10/18/12 ALEGENT HEALTH , LENOX CLINIC LENOX , IOWA TSP PROJECT NO. 07120299 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL 15050 - 1 SECTION 15050 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL PART 1

10/18/12 ALEGENT HEALTH, LENOX CLINIC LENOX, IOWA

TSP PROJECT NO. 07120299

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL 15050 - 1

SECTION 15050 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Mechanical sleeve seals. 5. Sleeves. 6. Escutcheons. 7. Grout. 8. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 9. Painting and finishing. 10. Concrete bases. 11. Supports and anchorages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. 2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. 3. PE: Polyethylene plastic.




4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Transition fittings. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Escutcheons.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

C. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

C. Materials and equipment stored on the site shall have protective covering to prevent damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.




B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.




F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235. 2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. 3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.

I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.

2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div. c. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div. d. JCM Industries. e. Smith-Blair, Inc. f. Viking Johnson.

2. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling. 3. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling. 4. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.

B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC or PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.

C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.

D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC or PVC four-part union. Include brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.

E. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.

2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.




B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.

D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.

1. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.

F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F

2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates

to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.7 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Round sheet metal tube closed with snaplock or lapped and spot welded longitudinal joint.

1. Minimum sheet metal thickness as follows: 2. For sleeves 12-inches and smaller: 0.0276-inch-thickness (24-gauge) 3. For sleeves 13-inches to 16-inches: 0.0336-inch thickness (22-gauge) 4. For sleeves 17-inches to 20-inches: 0.0396-inch thickness (20-gauge) 5. For sleeves 20-inches and larger: 0.0516-inch thickness (18-gauge)

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.




C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

2.8 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

E. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.

F. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.

2.9 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi,28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.




D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

1. New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated

finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or split-casting,

cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece or split-casting, cast-brass

type with polished chrome-plated finish. g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type. h. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate

type.

M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs, and through gypsum-board walls and partitions that are fire- and smoke-rated or require non-code related smoke barrier construction.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas, laboratory areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.

2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, or as needed for a mechanical sleeve seal, if required. Use the following sleeve materials:

a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For all pipe sizes.




b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: May be used for all pipe sizes penetrating gypsum-board partitions.

3. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using acoustical joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

N. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. 2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter. 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements

required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

O. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

P. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire- and smoke-rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials.

Q. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

R. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.




E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. 3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket

fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. 6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix.

J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.

K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.

L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.

1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.




3. Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Remove markings, stickers, tags, lubricants, protective oils, and other substances and repair damaged surfaces of equipment, piping, ductwork that will be exposed to view in finished spaces. Clean and prepare surfaces that are specified to be finish painted.

B. Painting of mechanical systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 9 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."

C. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.6 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Bases and Curbs: Cast-in-place bases and curbs are specified in Division 03 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete.”

1. Provide scaled layouts of bases and curbs with sizes and locations dimensioned to concrete walls and columns.

2. Determine base and curb size based on purchased equipment shop drawings. Base sizes and locations shall not be scaled from Drawings.

3. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit.

4. Anchor equipment to concrete bases and curbs according to manufacturer’s installation instructions.

C. Construction Details: Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.

2. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.




3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 5. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in

Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.8 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

3.9 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.

END OF SECTION 15050



COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 15055 - 1

SECTION 15055 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Motor controllers. Variable frequency drives. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in mechanical equipment schedules or Sections.

B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

C. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.




2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: NEMA Premium-efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

E. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

F. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

G. Insulation: Class F.

H. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

I. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Drives: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by variable frequency drive supplier.

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters.

2. Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. 3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected

motors.

B. Bearing Protection Rings for Motors Used with Variable Frequency Drives: Provide conductive microfiber motor shaft grounding rings to prevent damage to motor bearings by safely discharging static electrical charges to ground. Bearing protection rings shall be equivalent to Aegis SGR Bearing Rings.

C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run.




4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive field-installed motors for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before motor installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 MOTOR INSTALLATION

A. Anchor each motor assembly to base, adjustable rails, or other support, arranged and sized according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by bolting. Level and align with load transfer link.




3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Run each motor with its controller. Demonstrate correct rotation, alignment, and speed at motor design load.

2. Test interlocks and control features for proper operation. 3. Verify that current in each phase is within nameplate rating.

B. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control testing:

C. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:

1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.15.1. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the following:

1. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical connections for compliance with requirements.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3. Verify bearing lubrication. 4. Verify proper motor rotation. 5. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

a. Test procedures used. b. Test results that comply with requirements. c. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to

achieve compliance.

E. Report unusual conditions and correct deficiencies of field installed units.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Align motors, bases, shafts, pulleys and belts. Tension belts according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 CLEANING

A. After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B. Clean motors, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.




3.6 RESPONSIBILITY/WORK INVOLVED

A. The electrical service and electrical power connections required for all items of equipment furnished under this contract will be made by others under the electrical specifications and drawings.

B. All disconnects will be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor, unless noted otherwise. All motors will be furnished and installed by the Mechanical Contractor.

C. The Mechanical Contractor shall supply detailed wiring diagrams for connections of all motors, controls, and accessory items.

D. Any changes in wire or conduit size or addition of electrical equipment made necessary due to the installation of a larger motor or equipment than specified, or extra motors, shall be the responsibility of this Contractor.

E. All electrical work furnished integral with equipment shall be in accordance with NEC, i.e., integral disconnect switches shall not be used for junction boxes, all control and internal wiring shall be properly fused, and conductors shall be color coded.





THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060 - 1

SECTION 15060 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports."

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and thermal-hanger shield insert indicated.

B. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.


A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

B. Engineering Responsibility: Design and calculations for each pipe support and trapeze by a qualified professional engineer.

1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: Experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations




of hangers and supports that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

C. Compliance: Comply with SBC with any amendments and with NFPA 13 for hangers and supports used as components of fire protection systems.

D. Operators: Use licensed personnel that are certified to operate specific tools and fasteners.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work are limited to the manufacturers specified. Submit alternate manufacturers to the Engineer for review and approval before bidding.

1. Pipe Hangers:

a. Anvil Corp. b. B-Line Systems, Inc. c. GS Metals Corp. d. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc. e. National Pipe Hanger Corp. f. PHS Industries, Inc. g. PHD Manufacturing.

2. Channel Support Systems:

a. Anvil Corp.; Power-Strut Unit. b. B-Line Systems, Inc. c. GS Metals Corp. d. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.; O-Strut Div. e. National Pipe Hanger Corp. f. PHD Manufacturing. g. Unistrut Corp.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts:

a. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc. b. PHD Manufacturing. c. PHS Industries, Inc. d. Pipe Shields, Inc. e. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc. f. Value Engineered Products, Inc.

4. Powder-Actuated Fastener Systems:

a. Gunnebo Fastening Corp. b. Hilti, Inc. c. ITW Ramset/Red Head. d. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.




2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components.

1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

B. Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated. 2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are

in direct contact with copper tubing.

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-psi minimum compressive-strength insulation, encased in sheet metal shield.

1. Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier.

2. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate.

3. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe. 4. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. 5. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below

ambient air temperature.

D. Select hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping and to exactly fit around pipe and insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping. Provide means of adjustment for piping level and elevation for distributed loads and to achieve required pipe slope.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. UL and FM approved for fire protection systems.

C. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.

D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry, hydraulic-cement grout

E. Washers: ASTM F844, steel, plain, flat washers

F. Bolts and Nuts: ASTM B 18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex-head, track bolts, and nuts.

PART 3 - EXECUTION




3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger requirements, if any, are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Specification Sections.

C. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, 1/2" to 30".

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, 4" to 16", requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, 3/4" to 24", requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, 1/2" to 24", if little or no insulation is required.

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, 1/2" to 4", to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

6. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, 1/2" to 8".

7. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipe, 1/2" to 30". 8. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or

contraction. 9. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, 4" to 36", with steel pipe

base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe. 10. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes, 2

1/2" to 36", if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

11. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, 1" to 30", from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

12. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, 2 1/2" to 20", from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

13. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, 2" to 42", if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.

14. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, 2" to 24", if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.

15. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, 2" to 30", if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.

D. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, 3/4" to 20". 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, 3/4" to

20", if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

E. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:




1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

F. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads

are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads. 10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel. 12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where head room is limited.

G. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree insert of high-density, 100-psi minimum compressive-strength, water-repellent-treated calcium silicate or cellular-glass pipe insulation, same thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor barrier and encased in 360-degree sheet metal shield.




H. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-

1/4 inches. 3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with

springs. 4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal

expansion in piping systems. 5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability

factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger. 6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit

variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. Do not violate pipe manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled channel systems.

1. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.

D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.




E. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

F. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded.

K. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe 4" and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. 1/4" to 3 1/2": 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. 4": 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. 5" and 6": 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. 8" to 14": 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. 16" to 24": 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes 8" and Larger: Include wood inserts. 6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.




L. Do not use powder-actuated or mechanical fasteners in lightweight concrete slabs or in concrete slabs less than 4" thick or in post-tensioned slabs where the cable locations are unknown.

M. Do not place powder-actuated or mechanical fasteners in bottom of concrete joists; attachments shall be on the side of the joists above the centerline to avoid the reinforcing steel.

N. Do not place powder-actuated or mechanical fasteners attachments in composite steel decking unless approved by the Engineer.

3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support equipment above floor. Provide factory fabricated tank saddles for heat exchangers or tanks mounted on steel stands.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

3.4 METAL FABRICATION

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours

of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated or required slope of pipe.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.




B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.








MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15075 - 1

SECTION 15075 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation:

1. Equipment identification devices. 2. Manufactured pipe identification markers. 3. Duct identification markers. 4. Valve tags. 5. Valve schedules.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured identification product used, provide color samples, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

B. Valve numbering scheme.

C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Furnish extra copies (in addition to mounted copies) to include in maintenance manuals.


A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, 2007 "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices for piping.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Black. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately

larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules).

2.2 MANUFACTURED PIPE IDENTIFICATION MARKERS

A. Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing direction of flow.

1. Colors: Comply with ASME A13.1, 2007 unless otherwise indicated. 2. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each

application length. 3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full-band pipe markers

extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location. 4. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Either full-band or strip-type

pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required for label. 5. Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions; or

as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Markers: Precoiled semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers: Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive back.

D. Plastic Tape: Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least 3 mils thick with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive back.

1. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: 1-1/2 inches minimum.

2. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches or Larger: 2-1/2 inches minimum.




2.3 DUCT IDENTIFICATION MARKERS

A. Duct Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include direction and quantity of airflow and duct service (such as supply, return, general exhaust and lab exhaust). Include contact-type, permanent adhesive.

2.4 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch sequenced numbers. Provide 5/32-inch hole for fastener.

1. Material: 0.032-inch-thick brass. 2. Valve-Tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain or beaded chain.

2.5 VALVE SCHEDULES

A. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on standard-size bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on masonry walls for each page of valve schedule. Include mounting screws.

2. Frame: Extruded aluminum. 3. Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing Quality B, 2.5-mm, single-thickness

glass.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS, GENERAL

A. Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more than single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's option.

3.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Install and permanently fasten equipment labels on each item of mechanical equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located where not easily visible. Locate labels where accessible and visible. Include labels for the following general categories of equipment:

1. Fuel-burning units, including boilers, furnaces, and heaters. 2. Pumps, condensing units, and similar motor-driven units. 3. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, heat recovery units, and similar equipment. 4. Heat pumps and fans.

B. Install equipment labels with screws or permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical equipment.




3.3 PIPING IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify all piping using manufactured pipe identification markers. Pipe markers shall indicate service of each piping system, with flow arrows showing direction of flow. Install pipe markers complying with ASME A13.1, 2007 for each piping system.

1. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Pre-tensioned pipe markers. Use size to ensure a tight fit.

2. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Self-adhesive pipe markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 3/4 inch wide, lapped at least 1-1/2 inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.

3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Self-adhesive pipe markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 1-1/2 inches wide, lapped at least 3 inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.

4. Apply lacquer under and over marker for firm adhesion. Bands shall be spaced in such a way that they can easily be observed from any location in the room.

B. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums, and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and enclosures that are not accessible. 4. At access doors, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, omit intermediately spaced markers.

3.4 DUCT IDENTIFICATION

A. Install duct markers with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes:

1. Green: For cold-air supply ducts. 2. Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts. 3. Blue: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts. 4. ASME A13.1, 2007 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust. 5. Letter Size: Minimum 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately

larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

B. Locate markers near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.

3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.




B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches, round. b. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches, round. c. Fire Protection: 1-1/2 inches, round. d. Gas: 1-1/2 inches, round. e. Steam: 1-1/2 inches, round.

2. Valve-Tag Color:

a. Cold Water: White. b. Hot Water: White. c. Fire Protection: White. d. Gas: White. e. Steam: White.

3. Letter Color:

a. Cold Water: Black. b. Hot Water: Black. c. Fire Protection: Black. d. Gas: Black. e. Steam: Black.

3.6 VALVE-SCHEDULE INSTALLATION

A. Mount valve schedule on wall in accessible location in each major equipment room.

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by other work.

B. Reattach plastic pipe markers which have peeled loose or fallen off from piping. Reattach in a manner which will stay permanently fixed on the piping.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules.





DUCT INSULATION 15081 - 1

SECTION 15081 - DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following duct services:

1. Concealed and exposed supply-air. 2. Concealed and exposed return-air. 3. Concealed and exposed, outside-air and mixed-air. 4. Concealed and exposed, exhaust-air and relief-air.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any).

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.




1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

C. Do not store or install duct insulation materials until the building is enclosed and weather-tight. Use extra-ordinary means to keep insulation clean and dry.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Duct Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor Duct Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type II for sheet materials.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.

F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap. b. Johns Manville; Microlite. c. Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap. d. Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap.




G. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory-applied ASJ or FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board. b. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas. c. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board. d. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.

H. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap. b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex. c. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation. d. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation.

2.2 DUCT LINER

A. Fibrous-Glass Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with NAIMA AH124.

1. Manufacturers:

a. CertainTeed Corp.; Insulation Group. b. Johns Manville International, Inc. c. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH. d. Owens Corning.

2. Materials: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be coated to prevent erosion of glass fibers.

a. Thickness: 1 inch having 1-1/2 pound density. b. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature. c. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-

developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84. d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916. e. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for adhesive attachment,

mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in duct.

1) Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50-lb-tensile, dead-load test perpendicular to duct wall.

2) Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without projecting more than 1/8 inch into airstream.




3) Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire-hazard classification of duct liner system.

2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.


a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-127.

b. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-60/85-70.

2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.



b. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-50.


D. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.


a. Dow Corning Corporation; 739, Dow Silicone. b. Johns Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive. c. Speedline Corporation; Polyco VP Adhesive.


2.4 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).




B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.


a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-80/30-90.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.

C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.




2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.

D. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services.


a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; Encacel.

b. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 60-95/60-96.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.

E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.




2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight.




5. Color: White.

2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).


a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-50 AHV2.


3. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over duct insulation.

4. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F. 5. Color: White.

2.6 SEALANTS

A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:




2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: Aluminum. 6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. ASJ Flashing Sealants and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:



2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: White. 6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).




2.7 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

2.8 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.


a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0836. c. Compac Corporation; 104 and 105. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lb force/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.


a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 491 AWF FSK. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. c. Compac Corporation; 110 and 111. d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW NT, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lb force/inch in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.


a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 370 White PVC tape.




b. Compac Corporation; 130. c. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.

2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 6 mils. 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 lb force/inch in width.

D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.


a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 488 AWF. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800. c. Compac Corporation; 120. d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW.

2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils. 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34 lb force/inch in width.

2.9 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:


a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals. b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and Springs.

2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide.

3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide.

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, of diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1. 2) GEMCO; CD. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS.

2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, of diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.





1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1. 2) GEMCO; CD. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS.

3. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick, galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.


1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150. 2) GEMCO; R-150. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.

b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.

D. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. C & F Wire.

2.10 CORNER ANGLES

A. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14.

B. Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, stainless steel according to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.

B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.

Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.




4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation below roof surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.

1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:




1. Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.

2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 APPLICATION OF DUCT LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS

A. Duct dimensions indicated on the drawings are internal sizes after the duct lining has been applied. Increase the duct dimensions as required to keep the internal duct dimensions equal to those indicated on the drawings.

B. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.

C. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing.

D. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.

E. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge overlapping.

F. In rectangular ducts, do not apply liner using longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.

G. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm.

H. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.

I. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.




b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.




e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.

5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturers recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. The Architect may inspect ductwork insulation by directing removal of field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their insulation. The extent of inspection shall be as required to determine compliance with requirements. Re-insulation shall be completed at the Contractor’s expense.

B. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.

3.9 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Ducts Requiring Insulation:




1. Concealed and exposed supply-air. 2. Concealed and exposed return-air. 3. Concealed and exposed, outside-air and mixed-air. 4. Concealed and exposed, exhaust-air and relief-air.

B. Items Not Insulated:

1. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. 3. Factory-insulated plenums and casings. 4. Flexible connectors. 5. Vibration-control devices. 6. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.

3.10 DUCT NSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Supply Air Ducts: Round concealed and exposed:

1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket. 2. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches. 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Factory-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. 6. Density: 1 lb. 7. R-Value: 5.6.

B. Supply and Return Air Ducts: Rectangular, concealed and exposed:

1. Material: Duct Liner. 2. Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: None, but glass fiber surfaces exposed to the air stream shall be

coated to prevent erosion of the material. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: No. 6. Density: 1-1/2 lb.

C. Outside Air and Combustion Air Ducts: Rectangular, concealed and exposed:

1. Material: Mineral-fiber board. 2. Thickness: 2 inches. 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Factory-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. 6. Density: 3 lb. 7. R-Value: 8.7.

D. Outside Air and Combustion Air Ducts: Round, concealed and exposed:

1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket. 2. Thickness: 2 inches. 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Factory-applied Jacket: Foil and paper. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. 6. Density: 1-1/2 lb.




7. R-Value: 8.7.

E. Service: Rectangular and round, dishwasher exhaust, relief and general exhaust ducts, concealed - maximum 15 feet from roof or louver opening including drip pans and louver plenums.

1. Material: Mineral-fiber board. 2. Thickness: 2 inches. 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: No. 6. Density: 3 lb. 7. R-Value: 8.7.




PIPE INSULATION 15083 - 1

SECTION 15083 - PIPE INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:

1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

2. Attachment and covering of heat trace inside insulation. 3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of

insulation. 5. Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections. 6. Application of field-applied jackets.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 150 or less.





A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of steam or electric heat tracing.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat-trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of piping that have satisfactory test results.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Inorganic Glass Fiber Insulation:

a. CertainTeed Manson. b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH. c. Johns Manville Corp. d. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. e. Schuller International, Inc.

2. Cellular-Glass Insulation:

a. Pittsburgh-Corning Corp.

3. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Rubatex Corp.

4. Calcium Silicate Insulation:

a. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. b. Pabco. c. Schuller International, Inc.




2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with the following:

1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory-applied, all-purpose, vapor-retarder jacket.

2. Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing. 3. Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following classes and grades:

a. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass-fiber insulation, for sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for bonding lagging cloth to unfaced glass-fiber insulation.

b. Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass-fiber insulation to metal surfaces.

4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retarder mastic for indoor applications. Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.

5. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195. 6. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 196. 7. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with

ASTM C 449/C 449M.

B. Cellular-Glass Insulation: Inorganic, foamed or cellulated glass, annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells, incombustible.

1. Preformed Pipe Insulation, without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1. 2. Preformed Pipe Insulation, with Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2.

C. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.

1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 2. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.

D. Calcium Silicate Insulation: Preformed pipe sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a nonasbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I.

E. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.

2.3 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and aluminum foil.

C. PVC Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils thick; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.

1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 2. PVC Jacket Color: White or gray.




D. Standard PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 20-mil-thick, high-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC.

1. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories for the disabled.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

E. Aluminum Jacket: Aluminum roll stock, ready for shop or field cutting and forming to indicated sizes. Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 3003 alloy, H-14 temper.

1. Finish and Thickness: Smooth finish, 0.010 inch thick. 2. Moisture Barrier: 1-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. 3. Elbows: Preformed, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows; same material,

finish, and thickness as jacket.

2.4 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS

A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape. Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd.

1. Tape Width: 4 inches.

B. Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch thick. 2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick. 3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick.

C. Wire: 0.080-inch, nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, galvanized steel.

2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.





3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for each piping system.

C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs.

E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder.

H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

I. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

J. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.

K. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for applying insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties.

L. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic.

1. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation on

anchor legs at least 12 inches from point of attachment to pipe and taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.

3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the hanger, support, and shield.




M. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.

N. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.

O. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:

1. Pull jacket tight and smooth. 2. Circumferential Joints: Cover with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip and spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.

a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor retarder.

4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.

5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids with vapor-retarder mastic.

P. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof flashing.

1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic. 2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends. 3. Extend metal jacket of exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top

of roof flashing. 4. Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.

Q. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls, terminate insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor-retarder mastic.

R. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and floors.

S. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping."

T. Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly.

1. For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor-retarder mastic where floor supports penetrate vapor retarder.

3.4 MINERAL-FIBER AND CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:




1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with vapor-retarder mastic.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.

B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:

1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus

twice the thickness of the pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of insulation of the same thickness as the pipe insulation.

4. Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlapping seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.

C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:

1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. When premolded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply mitered sections of pipe insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.

3. Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers. Overlap PVC covers on pipe insulation jackets at least 1 inch at each end. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.

D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:

1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. When premolded insulation sections are not available, apply glass-fiber blanket insulation to valve body.

2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to stainer basket without disturbing insulation.

3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fitting

covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.

5. For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation with canvas jacket and sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

3.5 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION


1. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation.




2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.


1. Apply pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus

twice the thickness of the pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of the same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.


1. Apply mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.


1. Apply preformed valve covers manufactured of the same material as pipe insulation and attached according to the manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Apply cut segments of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, fabricate removable sections of insulation arranged to allow access to stainer basket.

3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.

3.6 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION APPLICATION


1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals and tighten without deforming insulation materials.

2. Apply two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches. Secure inner layer with 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, stainless-steel wire spaced at 12-inch intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals.

3. Apply a skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to surface of installed insulation. When dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 1 inch. Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth or tape. Thin the finish coat to achieve smooth finish.


1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus

twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.




3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block insulation of the same material and thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Finish flange insulation the same as pipe insulation.


1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. When premolded sections of insulation are not available, apply mitered sections of calcium silicate insulation. Secure insulation materials with stainless-steel wire.

3. Finish insulation of fittings the same as pipe insulation.


1. Apply mitered segments of calcium silicate insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to stainer basket without disturbing insulation.

2. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3. Finish valve and specialty insulation the same as pipe insulation.

3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION

A. Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated or required, directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets.

1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch-thick coats of jacket manufacturer's

recommended adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation.

B. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated, or required.

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Apply lap or joint strips with the same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Apply jackets with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at

end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation

with vapor-retarder mastic.

C. Apply PVC jacket where indicated or required, with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

D. Apply metal jacket where indicated or required, with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.




3.8 FINISHES

A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of the insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

3.9 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment:

1. Flexible connectors. 2. Vibration-control devices. 3. Fire-suppression piping. 4. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Below-grade piping, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury. 7. Air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators.


A. Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:

1. Inspect fittings and valves randomly selected by Architect. 2. Remove fitting covers from 20 elbows or 1 percent of elbows, whichever is less, for

various pipe sizes. 3. Remove fitting covers from 20 valves or 1 percent of valves, whichever is less, for various

pipe sizes.

B. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new materials according to these Specifications.

C. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for inspection according to these Specifications.

3.11 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor retarders, and field-applied jackets.

B. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material, thickness, and jacket requirements.




3.12 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Service: Domestic hot and recirculated hot water.

1. Operating Temperature: 60 to 160 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber. 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

a. Pipe, up to 2 inches: 1 inch thick. b. Pipe, Over 2 inches: 1 1/2 inch thick.

4. Field-Applied Jacket: None. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: No. 6. Finish: None.

B. Service: Domestic cold water.

1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 60 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber. 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

a. Pipe, Up to 1 inches: 1/2 inch thick. b. Pipe, Over 1 inches: 1 inch thick.

4. Field-Applied Jacket: None. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. 6. Finish: None.

C. Service: Condensate drain piping.

1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 75 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric. 3. Insulation Thickness: 1 inch. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: None. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. 6. Finish: None.

D. Service: Refrigerant suction and hot-gas by-pass piping.

1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 50 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric. 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

a. Copper Pipe, up to 1 inch: 1 1/2 inch thick. b. Copper Pipe, over 1 inch: 2 inch thick.

4. Field-Applied Jacket: None. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. 6. Finish: None.




3.13 EXTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Service: Refrigerant suction, and hot gas by-pass piping.

1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 50 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric. 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

a. Copper Pipe, up to 1 inch: 1 1/2 inch thick. b. Copper Pipe, over 1 inch: 2 inch thick.

4. Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. 6. Finish: None.




VALVES 15110 - 1

SECTION 15110 - VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following general-duty valves:

1. Bronze ball valves. 2. Bronze gate valves. 3. Bronze globe valves. 4. Bronze angle valves. 5. Bronze check valves. 6. Cast-iron gate valves. 7. Cast-iron globe valves. 8. Cast-iron angle valves. 9. Cast-iron plug valves. 10. Iron ball valves. 11. Iron or ductile iron butterfly valves. 12. High-pressure butterfly valves. 13. Iron swing check valves. 14. Iron wafer check valves. 15. Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves. 16. Resilient-seated, cast-iron, eccentric plug valves. 17. Integrated valve - piping assemblies.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The following are standard abbreviations for valves:

1. CWP: Cold working pressure. 2. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 3. BUNA-N: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. 4. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic. 5. SWP: Steam working pressure. 6. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials; valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.



VALVES 15110 - 2

B. Maintenance Data: Include detailed manufacturer's instructions on adjusting, servicing, disassembling, and repairs.


A. ASME Compliance: ASME B31.1 for power piping valves and ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

1. Exceptions: Domestic hot- and cold-water piping valves unless referenced.

B. ASME Compliance for Iron Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and design criteria.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.

D. MSS Compliance: Comply with MSS Standard Practice documents referenced.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Integrated valve - piping assemblies shall be permanently tagged indicating the device served, gpm flow, and the water pressure drop at required flow.

2. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 3. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 4. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 5. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 6. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 7. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Manufacturers for general duty valves when no other manufacturers are specified:

a. American Valve, Inc. b. Anvil International Inc., Gruvlok.



VALVES 15110 - 3

c. Cincinnati Valve Co. d. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. e. Crane Co. f. Hammond Valve. g. Jamesbury, Inc. h. Milwaukee Valve Company. i. NIBCO INC. j. Powell, Wm. Co. k. Titan Flow Control, Inc. l. Walworth Co. m. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

2.2 VALVES, GENERAL

A. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves.

B. Bronze Valves: NPS 2 and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated. (Any size bronze valves shall not have more than 15% zinc content - red brass.)

C. Iron Valves: NPS 2-1/2 and larger with flanged ends, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Valve Actuators:

1. Chainwheel: For attachment to valves, of size and mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation" Article in Part 3.

2. Gear Drive: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 and larger. 3. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types. 4. Lever Handle: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller, except plug valves. 5. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 10

plug valves, for each size square plug head.

G. Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves. Valves shall have 2" extended handles of non-thermal conductive material. Also provide a protective sleeve that allows operation of the valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing the insulation.

H. Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, and ASME B16.24 for bronze valves.

I. Valve Grooved Ends: AWWA C606.

1. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.

a. Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F for angle, check, gate, and globe valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves.

2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

J. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.



VALVES 15110 - 4

K. Ball Valves: Full port stainless steel balls and stems.

2.3 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Bronze Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-110.

B. Two-Piece, Bronze Ball Valves: Bronze body with full-port, stainless steel ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600-psig minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.

C. Safety-Exhaust, Bronze Ball Valves: Two-piece bronze body with exhaust vent opening, stainless steel ball with vent, blowout-proof stem, locking handle, and working pressure rating for compressed air of at least 125 psig and of 400-psig CWP.

2.4 BRONZE GATE VALVES

A. Bronze Gate Valves, General: MSS SP-80, with ferrous-alloy handwheel.

B. Type 1, Class 125, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with nonrising stem and bronze solid wedge.

C. Type 1, Class 150 and 200, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with nonrising stem and bronze solid wedge and union bonnet.

D. Type 2, Class 125, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze solid wedge.

E. Type 2, Class 150 and 200, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze solid wedge and union bonnet.

2.5 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES

A. Bronze Globe Valves, General: MSS SP-80, with ferrous-alloy handwheel.

B. Type 1, Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc.

C. Type 1, Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and union bonnet.

D. Type 1, Class 200, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with stainless steel disc and union bonnet.

E. Type 2, Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic TFE disc.

F. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic TFE disc and union bonnet.

G. Type 3, Class 300, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic TFE disc and union bonnet.

H. Type 3, Class 300, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and renewable seat include union bonnet.



VALVES 15110 - 5

2.6 BRONZE ANGLE VALVES

A. Bronze Angle Valves, General: MSS SP-80, with iron handwheel.

B. Type 1, Class 125, Bronze Angle Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc.

C. Type 1, Class 150, Bronze Angle Valves: Bronze body with teflon disc and union bonnet.

D. Type 1, Class 200, Bronze Angle Valves: Bronze body with stainless steel disc and union bonnet.

2.7 BRONZE CHECK VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. American Valve, Inc. 2. Cincinnati Valve Co. 3. Crane Co. 4. Milwaukee Valve Company. 5. NIBCO Inc. 6. Powell, Wm. Co. 7. Red-White Valve Corp. 8. Walworth Co.

B. Bronze Check Valves, General: MSS SP-80.

C. Type 2, Class 125, Bronze, Silent Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and bronze seat.

D. Type 3, Class 125, 150, 200, and 300, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze or TFE disc and seat.

2.8 CAST-IRON GATE VALVES

A. Cast-Iron Gate Valves, General: MSS SP-70, Type I.

B. Class 125 and 250, NRS, Bronze-Mounted, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: Cast-iron body with bronze trim, nonrising stem, and solid-wedge disc.

C. Class 125 and 250, OS&Y, Bronze-Mounted, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: Cast-iron body with bronze trim, rising stem, and solid-wedge disc.

2.9 CAST-IRON GLOBE VALVES

A. Cast-Iron Globe Valves, General: MSS SP-85.

B. Type I, Class 125 and 250, Cast-Iron Globe Valves: Iron body with bronze seats.

2.10 CAST-IRON ANGLE VALVES



VALVES 15110 - 6

A. Cast-Iron Angle Valves, General: MSS SP-85, Type II.

B. Class 125 and 250, Cast-Iron Angle Valves: Bronze mounted with iron body and bronze seats.

2.11 CAST-IRON PLUG VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Lubricated-Type, Cast-Iron Plug Valves:

a. Milliken Valve Co., Inc. b. Nordstrom Valves, Inc. c. Olson Technologies; Homestead Div. d. R & M Energy Systems (Tomball, TX). e. Walworth Co.

2. Nonlubricated-Type, Cast-Iron Plug Valves:

a. General Signal; DeZurik Unit. b. Mueller Flow Technologies. c. Tyco International, Ltd.; Tyco Valves & Controls. d. Wheatley Gaso, Inc. e. Xomox Corporation.

B. Cast-Iron Plug Valves, General: MSS SP-78.

C. Class 125, 150, 250, and 300, lubricated-type, cast-iron plug valves.

D. Class 125, 150, and 250, nonlubricated-type, cast-iron plug valves.

2.12 IRON BALL VALVES

A. Iron Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-72, with flanged ends.

B. Iron Ball Valves: Class 150 and 300, full port.

2.13 IRON OR DUCTILE IRON BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Iron Butterfly Valves, General: MSS SP-67, Type I, for bubble tight shutoff, dead-end service with disc and lining suitable for potable water, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Wafer, 150, 200, and 250-psig CWP Rating, Cast or Ductile Iron Butterfly Valves: Wafer type with one or two-piece stem.

C. Lug, 150, 200, and 250-psig CWP Rating, Cast or Ductile Iron Butterfly Valves: Lug type with one or two-piece stem.

D. Grooved-End, 175 and 300-psig CWP Rating, Ductile Iron Butterfly Valves: Ductile-iron or steel body with grooved or shouldered ends.



VALVES 15110 - 7

2.14 HIGH-PRESSURE BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Bray International, Inc. 2. Cooper Cameron Corp.; Cooper Cameron Valves Div. 3. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Flowseal. 4. General Signal; DeZurik Unit. 5. Jamesbury, Inc. 6. Milwaukee Valve Company. 7. Pratt, Henry Company. 8. Process Development & Control. 9. Tyco International, Ltd.; Tyco Valves & Controls.

B. High-Pressure Butterfly Valves, General: MSS SP-68. Stainless steel body, stainless steel disk, 17-4 stainless steel stem, reinforced Teflon seat.

C. Class 150, High-Pressure Butterfly Valves: Wafer type.

D. Class 150, High-Pressure Butterfly Valves: Lug type.

E. Class 300, High-Pressure Butterfly Valves: Wafer type.

F. Class 300, High-Pressure Butterfly Valves: Lug type.

2.15 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Type I, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats:

a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. Mueller Co. e. NIBCO INC. f. Walworth Co.

2. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Swing Check Valves:

a. Anvil International Inc., Gruvlok. b. Mueller Co. c. Victaulic Co. of America.

B. Iron Swing Check Valves, General: MSS SP-71.

C. Type I, Class 125 and 250, iron, swing check valves with metal seats.

D. 175 and 300-psig CWP Rating, Grooved-End, Swing Check Valves: Ductile-iron body with grooved or shouldered ends.



VALVES 15110 - 8

2.16 IRON WAFER CHECK VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Single-Plate, Iron, Wafer Check Valves:

a. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. b. Mueller Co. c. NIBCO Inc. d. Techno Corp. e. Titan Flow Control, Inc.

2. Dual-Plate, Iron, Wafer Check Valves:

a. Crane Co. b. Flomatic Valves. c. Mueller Steam Specialty. d. NIBCO INC. e. Titan Flow Control, Inc. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

B. Iron Wafer Check Valves, General: API 594, spring loaded.

C. Single-Plate, Class 125 or 150, Iron, Wafer Check Valves: Flangeless body.

D. Single-Plate, Class 125 or 250, Iron, Flanged Check Valves: Flanged-end body.

E. Dual-Plate, Class 125 or 150, Iron, Wafer Check Valves: Flangeless body.

2.17 SPRING-LOADED, LIFT-DISC CHECK VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Type I, Wafer Lift-Disc Check Valves:

a. Mueller Steam Specialty. b. NIBCO INC. c. Titan Flow Control, Inc.

2. Type III, Globe Lift-Disc Check Valves:

a. Flomatic Valves. b. NIBCO INC. c. Titan Flow Control, Inc. d. Val-Matic Valve & Mfg. Corp.

B. Lift-Disc Check Valves, General: FCI 74-1, with spring-loaded bronze or alloy disc and bronze or alloy seat.

C. Type I, Class 125 and 250, Wafer Lift-Disc Check Valves: Wafer style with cast-iron shell with diameter matching companion flanges.



VALVES 15110 - 9

D. Type III, Class 125 and 250, Globe Lift-Disc Check Valves: Globe style with cast-iron shell and flanged ends.

2.18 RESILIENT-SEATED, CAST-IRON, ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. General Signal; DeZurik Unit. 2. Milliken Valve Company. 3. Olson Technologies; Homestead Div. 4. Pratt, Henry Company. 5. Val-Matic Valve & Mfg. Corp.

B. Resilient-Seated, Cast-Iron, Eccentric Plug Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Smaller: Design similar to MSS SP-108, and rated for 175-psig minimum CWP.

1. Resilient Seating Material: Suitable for potable-water service, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Resilient-Seated, Cast-Iron, Eccentric Plug Valves, NPS 3 and Larger: MSS SP-108, and rated for 175-psig minimum CWP.

1. Resilient Seating Material: Suitable for potable-water service, unless otherwise indicated.

2.19 INTEGRATED VALVE - PIPING ASSEMBLIES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Bell & Gossett ITT, Div. of ITT Fluid Technology Corp. 2. Delta Auto Touch Component System. 3. Flow Design Inc. 4. Gerand Engineering Co. 5. Griswold Control. 6. Hydronic Components Inc. (HCI) Terminator System. 7. TA-Hydronics/Victaulic.

B. Integrated valve and piping assemblies shall have isolation valves, strainer valves, balancing valves, low loss venturi, memory stops, and integral pressure temperature readout ports, all with stem extensions to allow for insulation. Provide braided stainless steel hose connectors for assemblies connecting piping to equipment with fans, pumps, or motors.

2.20 CIRCUIT BALANCING VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Bell & Gossett ITT, Div. of ITT Fluid Technology Corp. 2. Delta Auto Touch Component System. 3. Flow Design Inc. 4. Gerand Engineering Co. 5. Griswold Control. 6. Hydronic Components Inc. (HCI) Terminator System. 7. TA-Hydronics/Victaulic.



VALVES 15110 - 10

B. Manual circuit balancing valves for hot water heating service or domestic hot water service shall be globe style valves for precise regulation and control. Iron valves shall be rated for 175 psi, and bronze valves at 240 psi at 250˚F.

1. Valves 1/2” to 2” shall be constructed of dezincification resistant brass (DZR) or bronze alloy.

2. Valves 2 ½” to 12” shall be constructed of iron with ANSI class 125/150 flanged or grooved ends.

3. Each valve shall have two metering/test ports with internal check valves and protective caps. All valves shall be equipped with visual readout and concealed memory stops for repeatable regulation and control.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

C. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly valves. 2. Throttling Service: Angle, ball, butterfly, or globe valves. 3. Pump Discharge: Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted.



VALVES 15110 - 11

C. Hot and cold domestic service piping:

1. Valves 2 1/2" and smaller:

a. Ball Valves: Valves shall be rated 150 psi SWP and 600 psi non-shock WWP and shall have 2-piece cast bronze bodies, (B-584, B-61, or B-62) TFE seats, full or standard port, separate pack nut with adjustable stem packing, anti-blowout stems and stainless steel ball and stem or chrome-plated brass/bronze ball and brass stem. Valve ends shall have full depth ANSI threads or extended solder connections and be manufactured to comply with MSS-SP110. Valves shall be similar to:

1) Standard Port: NIBCO T-580-70-66 (threaded), S-580-70-66 (solder). 2) Full Port: NIBCO T-585-70-66 (threaded), S-585-70-66 (solder). 3) Standard Port: NIBCO T580-70 (threaded), S580-70 (solder). 4) Full Port: NIBCO T585-70 (threaded), S585-70 (solder). Note: Where piping is insulated, ball valves shall be equipped with 2" extended handles of non-thermal conductive material. Also, provide a protective sleeve that allows operation of the valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing the insulation. Memory stops, which are fully adjustable after insulation is applied, shall be included. Valves shall be similar to:

5) Standard Port: NIBCO T580-7ONS (T580-70-66NS) (threaded), S580-7ONS (S-580-70-66NS) (solder).

6) Full Port: NIBCO T585-7ONS (T-585-70-66NS) (threaded), S585-7ONS (T-585-70-66NS) (solder).

b. Check Valves: Valves shall be Class 125 and 200 psi WWP, shall be Y-pattern swing-type manufactured in accordance with MSS-SP80, bronze ASTM B-62 body with TFE seat disc. Where higher operating pressures approach 150 psi, Class 150/300 psi WWP valves of like construction shall be used. Valve ends may be threaded or solder-type. Valves shall be similar to:

1) Class 125 NIBCO T413-Y (threaded), S413-Y (solder). 2) Class 150 NIBCO T433-Y (threaded), S433-Y (solder).

2. Valves 2 1/2" and larger:

a. Butterfly Valves: Valves shall be lug or IPS grooved body style manufactured in accordance with MSS-SP67 rated at least 200 psi non-shock cold water working pressure. Body shall have 2" extended neck for insulating and shall be ductile iron. Valve shall have aluminum bronze alloy disc with EPDM rubber seat and seals. Stem shall be 400 series stainless steel and shall not have exposed stem to disc fasteners. Sizes 2 1/2" - 6" shall be lever operated with 10-position throttling plate, sizes 8" and larger shall have weatherproof gear operators. Lug-style shall be capable for use as isolation valves and for dead-end service (no pins or fasteners to be used) at full pressure without the need for downstream flanges. Valves shall be similar to:

1) Lug body, aluminum bronze disc NIBCO LD2000-3 (lever operator), LD 2000-5 (gear operator).

2) Grooved body, rubber-coated disc NIBCO GD4765-3 (lever operator), GD4765-5 (gear operator).



VALVES 15110 - 12

b. Check Valves: Valves shall be Class 125 and 200 psi WWP, shall be swing-type manufactured in accordance with MSS-SP71, flanged ASTM A126 Class B cast iron body with bronze trim, non-asbestos gasket. Swing check with outside lever and spring to be used on sump, sewage, and storm drain lines. Valves shall be similar to:

1) Swing-type NIBCO F918-B. 2) Swing-type with outside lever and spring NIBCO F918-BL&S.

c. Pump Discharge: Valves shall be Class 125 and 200 psi WWP, shall be flanged style with stainless steel spring, center guided bronze disc or double disc, body of cast iron ASTM A126 Class B or A48. Valves shall be similar to:

1) Spring-actuated flanged type NIBCO F910B. 2) Spring-actuated wafer type NIBCO W910-B (center guided), W-920-W

(double disc). 3) Swing-type with outside lever and spring/weight NIBCO F918-BL&S

(BL&W).

D. Hot water heating piping:

1. Valves 2" and smaller:

a. Ball Valves: Valves shall be rated 150 psi SWP and 600 psi non-shock WWP and shall have 2-piece cast bronze bodies, (B-584, B-61, or B-62) TFE seats, full or standard port, separate pack nut with adjustable stem packing, anti-blowout stems and stainless steel ball and stem or chrome-plated brass/bronze ball and brass stem. Valve ends shall have full depth ANSI threads or extended solder connections and be manufactured to comply with MSS-SP110. Valves shall be similar to:

1) Standard Port: NIBCO T-580-70-66 (threaded), S-580-70-66 (solder). 2) Full Port: NIBCO T-585-70-66 (threaded), S-585-70-66 (solder). 3) Standard Port: NIBCO T580-70 (threaded), S580-70 (solder). 4) Full Port: NIBCO T585-70 (threaded), S585-70 (solder). Note: Where piping is insulated, ball valves shall be equipped with 2" extended handles of non-thermal conductive material. Also, provide a protective sleeve that allows operation of the valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing the insulation. Memory stops, which are fully adjustable after insulation is applied, shall be included. Valves shall be similar to:

5) Standard Port: NIBCO T580-7ONS (T580-70-66NS) (threaded), S580-7ONS (S-580-70-66NS) (solder).

6) Full Port: NIBCO T585-7ONS (T-585-70-66NS) (threaded), S585-7ONS (T-585-70-66NS) (solder).

b. Check Valves: Valves shall be Class 125 and 200 psi WWP, shall be Y-pattern swing-type manufactured in accordance with MSS-SP80, bronze ASTM B-62 body with TFE seat disc. Where higher operating pressures approach 150 psi, Class 150/300 psi WWP valves of like construction shall be used. Valve ends may be threaded or solder-type. Valves shall be similar to:

1) Class 125 NIBCO T413-Y (threaded), S413-Y (solder).



VALVES 15110 - 13

2) Class 150 NIBCO T433-Y (threaded), S433-Y (solder).

2. Valves 2 1/2 - 12":

a. Butterfly Valves: Valves shall be lug or IPS grooved body style manufactured in accordance with MSS-SP67 rated at least 200 psi non-shock cold water working pressure. Body shall have 2" extended neck for insulating and shall be ductile iron. Valve shall have aluminum bronze alloy disc with EPDM rubber seat and seals. Stem shall be 400 series stainless steel and shall not have exposed stem to disc fasteners. Sizes 2 1/2" - 6" shall be lever operated with 10-position throttling plate, sizes 8" and larger shall have weatherproof gear operators. Lug-style shall be suitable for bi-directional dead-end service (no pins or fasteners to be used) at full pressure without the need for downstream flanges. (EPDM shall be rated at 250ºF intermittent service and 225ºF continuous service.) Valves shall be similar to:

1) Lug body, aluminum bronze disc NIBCO LD2000-3 (lever operator), LD 2000-5 (gear operator).

2) Grooved body, rubber-coated disc NIBCO GD4765-3 (lever operator), GD4765-5 (gear operator).

3. Valves 2 1/2" and larger:

a. Check Valves: Valves shall be Class 125 and 200 psi WWP, shall be swing-type manufactured in accordance with MSS-SP71, flanged ASTM A126 Class B cast iron body with bronze trim, non-asbestos gasket. Valves shall be similar to:

1) Swing-type NIBCO F918-B.

b. Pump Discharge: Valves shall be Class 125 and 200 psi WWP, shall be flanged style with stainless steel spring, center guided bronze disc, body of cast iron ASTM A126 Class B or A48. Valves shall be similar to:

1) Spring-actuated flanged type NIBCO F910B. 2) Spring-actuated wafer type NIBCO W910-B. 3) Spring-actuated double door type NIBCO W-920-W. 4) Swing-type with outside lever and spring/weight NIBCO F918-BL&S

(BL&W).

3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.



VALVES 15110 - 14

F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Dual-Plate Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges, and with

stem upright and plumb. 3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb. 4. Silent Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position.

G. Install valves as indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. All valves shall be line size.

3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction.

B. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.6 VALVE IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify all valves except valves on radiators, convectors, cabinet unit heaters, blast heaters, and plumbing fixture stops, with valve identification tags.

B. Tags shall be made of 18-gauge polished brass, 1 1/2 inch diameter, with each tag designating appropriate service, appropriate valve number, room number where valve is located (an "x" shall precede room number if valve is in corridor outside room). Letters and numbers shall be minimum of 3/16 inches high stamped into surface.

C. Obtain valve number sequence from Owner.

D. Provide a chart of all valves to include the following items (Chart is to be bound in each maintenance portfolio):

1. Valve Identification Number 2. Location 3. Purpose




METERS AND GAGES 15122 - 1

SECTION 15122 - METERS AND GAGES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes meters and gages for mechanical systems and water meters installed outside the building.

B. Utility-Furnished Products: Water and gas meters will be furnished to site, ready for installation, unless otherwise indicated.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance curves for each meter, gage, fitting, specialty, and accessory specified.

B. Shop Drawings: Include schedule indicating manufacturer's number, scale range, fittings, and location for each meter and gage.

C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of meters and gages certifying accuracies under specified operating conditions and compliance with specified requirements.

D. Shop Drawings: For brackets for duct-mounting thermometers.

E. Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include data for the following:

1. Flow-measuring systems. 2. Flowmeters. 3. Thermal-energy flowmeters. 4. Water meters.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS





1. Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:

a. Dresser Industries, Inc.; Instrument Div.; Weksler Instruments Operating Unit. b. Ernst Gage Co. c. Marsh Bellofram. d. Palmer Instruments, Inc. e. Trerice: H. O. Trerice Co. f. Weiss Instruments, Inc. g. Winter's Thermogauges, Inc.

2. Pressure Gages:

a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge Div. b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; Instrument Div.; Ashcroft Commercial Sales Operation. c. Dresser Industries, Inc.; Instrument Div.; Weksler Instruments Operating Unit. d. Ernst Gage Co. e. Marsh Bellofram. f. Noshok, Inc. g. Trerice: H. O. Trerice Co. h. Weiss Instruments, Inc. i. WIKA Instruments Corp. j. Winter's Thermogauges, Inc.

3. Test Plugs:

a. Flow Design, Inc. b. MG Piping Products Co. c. National Meter. d. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc. e. Sisco Manufacturing Co. f. Trerice: H. O. Trerice Co. g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

4. Wafer-Orifice-Type Flow Elements:

a. ABB, Inc.; ABB Instrumentation. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Badger Meter, Inc.; Industrial Div. (Tulsa, OK). d. ITT Fluid Technology Corp.; ITT Bell & Gossett Div. e. Scott Fetzer Co.; Meriam Instrument Div.

5. Venturi-Type Flow Elements:

a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Badger Meter, Inc.; Industrial Div. (Tulsa, OK). c. Bailey-Fischer & Porter Co. d. Flow Design, Inc. e. Gerand Engineering Co. f. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. g. Leeds & Northrup. h. McCrometer, Inc. i. Preso Meters Corp. j. Victaulic Co. of America.




6. Pitot-Tube-Type Flow Elements:

a. Dieterich Standard Co. b. KOBOLD Instruments, Inc. c. Preso Meters Corp. d. Scott Fetzer Co.; Meriam Instrument Div. e. Taco, Inc.

7. Turbine Flowmeters:

a. Badger Meter, Inc.; Industrial Div. (Tulsa, OK). b. Bailey-Fischer & Porter Co. c. Baird Controls, Inc. d. Data Industrial Corp. e. Ecosol Corp. f. Engineering Measurements Co. g. Erdco Engineering Corp. h. Flow Research Corp. i. George Fischer Signet, Inc. j. Hersey Measurement Co. k. Hoffer Flow Controls, Inc. l. ISTEC Corp. m. Onicon, Inc. n. SeaFlow, Inc.

8. Water Meters:

a. ABB Water Meters, Inc. b. Badger Meter, Inc.; Industrial Div. (Milwaukee, WI). c. Carlon Meter Co., Inc. d. Grinnell Corp.; Mueller Co.; Hersey Products Div. e. Hersey Measurement Co. f. ISTEC Corp. g. Lee Brass Co.; Hays Div. h. Master Meter, Inc. i. Schlumberger Industries, Inc.; Water Div. j. Sensus Technologies, Inc. k. Water Specialties Corp.

2.2 THERMOMETERS, GENERAL

A. Scale Range: Temperature ranges for services listed are as follows:

1. Domestic Hot Water: 30 to 240 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions. 2. Domestic Cold Water: 0 to 100 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions. 3. Geothermal Water: 0 to 100 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions. 4. Hot Water: 30 to 240 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions. 5. Chilled Water: 0 to 100 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.

B. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range span.




2.3 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Description: ASTM E 1.

B. Case: Die cast and aluminum finished in baked-epoxy enamel, glass front, spring secured, 9 inches long.

C. Adjustable Joint: Finish to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360-degree adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.

D. Tube: Red or blue reading, organic-liquid filled with magnifying lens.

E. Scale: Satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.

F. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for separable socket; of length to suit installation.

2.4 SEPARABLE SOCKETS

A. Description: Fitting with protective socket for installation in threaded pipe fitting to hold fixed thermometer stem.

1. Material: Brass, for use in copper piping. 2. Material: Stainless steel, for use in steel piping. 3. Extension-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 2 inches, but not less than thickness of

insulation. Omit extension neck for sockets for piping not insulated. 4. Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe. 5. Cap: Threaded, with chain permanently fastened to socket. 6. Heat-Transfer Fluid: Oil or graphite.

2.5 THERMOMETER WELLS

A. Description: Fitting with protective well for installation in threaded pipe fitting to hold test thermometer.

1. Material: Brass, for use in copper piping. 2. Material: Stainless steel, for use in steel piping. 3. Extension-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 2 inches, but not less than thickness of

insulation. Omit extension neck for wells for piping not insulated. 4. Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe. 5. Cap: Threaded, with chain permanently fastened to socket. 6. Heat-Transfer Fluid: Oil or graphite.

2.6 DUCT THERMOMETER SUPPORT FLANGES

A. Description: Flanged-fitting bracket for mounting in hole of duct, with threaded end for attaching thermometer.

1. Extension-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 2 inches, but not less than thickness of exterior insulation.




2. Insertion-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 2 inches, but not less than thickness of insulation lining.

2.7 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Description: ASME B40.1, phosphor-bronze bourdon-tube type with bottom connection; dry type, unless liquid-filled-case type is indicated.

B. Case: Drawn steel, brass, or aluminum with 4-1/2-inch-diameter, glass lens.

C. Connector: Brass, NPS 1/4.

D. Scale: White-coated aluminum with permanently etched markings.

E. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle 50 percent of scale.

F. Range: Comply with the following:

1. Vacuum: 30 inches Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure. 2. Fluids under Pressure: Two times the operating pressure.

2.8 PRESSURE-GAGE FITTINGS

A. Valves: NPS 1/4 brass or stainless-steel needle type, suitable for system fluid and working pressure.

B. Syphons: NPS 1/4 coil of brass tubing with threaded ends.

C. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, NPS 1/4 brass bushing with corrosion-resistant porous-metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.

2.9 TEST PLUGS

A. Description: Nickel-plated, brass-body test plug in NPS 1/2 fitting.

B. Body: Length as required to extend beyond insulation.

C. Pressure Rating: 500 psig minimum.

D. Core Inserts: Two self-sealing valves, suitable for inserting 1/8-inch OD probe from dial-type thermometer or pressure gage.

E. Core Material for Air, Water, Oil, and Gas: 20 to 200 deg F, chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.

F. Test-Plug Cap: Gasketed and threaded cap, with retention chain or strap.

G. Test Kit: Pressure gage and adapter with probe, two bimetal dial thermometers, and carrying case.




1. Pressure Gage and Thermometer Ranges: Approximately two times the system's operating conditions.

2.10 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEMS

A. System includes calibrated flow element, separate meter, hoses or tubing, valves, fittings, and conversion chart compatible with flow element, meter, and system fluid.

1. Flow range of flow-measuring element and meter covers operating range of equipment or system where used.

2. Display: Visual instantaneous rate of flow.

B. Permanent Meters: Suitable for wall or bracket mounting. Include 6-inch-diameter, or equivalent, dial with fittings and copper tubing for connecting to flow element.

1. Scale: Gallons per minute. 2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of center 60 percent of range.

C. Portable Meters: Differential-pressure gage. Include two 12-foot hoses in carrying case with handle.

1. Scale: Inches of water, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 percent between 20 and 80 percent of range.

D. Include complete operating instructions with each meter.

E. Wafer-Orifice Flow Elements: Differential-pressure-design, orifice-insert flow element made for installation between pipe flanges.

1. Construction: Cast-iron body, brass valves with integral check valves and caps, and calibrated nameplate.

2. Pressure Rating: 300 psig. 3. Temperature Rating: 250 deg F.

F. Venturi Flow Elements: Differential-pressure-design, flow-element fitting made for installation in piping.

1. Construction: Bronze, brass, or factory-primed steel; with brass fittings and attached tag with flow conversion data. Include ends threaded for NPS 2 and smaller elements and flanged or welded for NPS 2-1/2 and larger elements.


G. Pitot-Tube Flow Elements: Differential-pressure design with probe made for insertion into piping.

1. Construction: Stainless-steel probe of length to span inside of pipe, with brass fittings and attached tag with flow conversion data.





2.11 TURBINE FLOWMETERS

A. Description: Insertion type; measures flow directly in gallons per minute.

1. Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body and plastic turbine or impeller, with integral direct-reading scale.

2. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum. 3. Temperature Rating: 180 deg F minimum. 4. Display: Visual instantaneous rate of flow. 5. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent. 6. Output Signal: 0-10 V

2.12 WATER METERS

A. Description: AWWA C700, displacement type, bronze case. Registers flow in gallons or cubic feet as required by utility.

B. Description: AWWA C701, turbine type. Registers flow in gallons or cubic feet as required by utility.

C. Description: AWWA C702, compound type, bronze case. Registers flow in gallons or cubic feet as required by utility.

D. Remote Registration System: Utility's standard; direct-reading type complying with AWWA C706; modified with signal transmitting assembly, low-voltage connecting wiring, and remote register assembly.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 METER AND GAGE INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install meters, gages, and accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions for applications where used.

3.2 THERMOMETER INSTALLATION

A. Install thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

B. Install in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone. 2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler, chiller and water heater. 3. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units and built-up central systems. 4. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat exchanger. 5. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat-recovery unit. 6. Inlet and outlet of each thermal storage tank. 7. Outside-air, return-air, and mixed-air ducts. 8. Each duct thermometer support flange.




C. Install separable sockets in vertical position in piping tees where fixed thermometers are indicated.

1. Install with socket extending to one-third of diameter of pipe. 2. Install with socket extending to center of pipe. 3. Fill sockets with oil or graphite and secure caps.

D. Install thermometer wells in vertical position in piping tees where test thermometers are indicated.

1. Install with stem extending to one-third of diameter of pipe. 2. Install with stem extending to center of pipe. 3. Fill wells with oil or graphite and secure caps.

E. Duct Thermometer Support Flanges: Install in wall of duct where duct thermometers are indicated. Attach to duct with screws.

3.3 PRESSURE-GAGE INSTALLATION

A. Install pressure gages in piping tees with pressure-gage valve located on pipe at most readable position.

B. Install dry-type pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Discharge of each pressure-reducing valve. 2. Building water-service entrance. 3. Chilled-water and condenser-water inlets and outlets of chillers.

C. Install liquid-filled-type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump.

D. Install pressure-gage needle valve and snubber in piping to pressure gages.

1. Exception: Install syphon instead of snubber in piping to steam pressure gages.

3.4 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install flowmeters in accessible and most readable positions in piping systems.

B. Install flow-measuring elements and meters at discharge of each pump, at inlet of each hydronic coil in built-up central systems, and elsewhere as indicated.

C. Install differential-pressure-type flow elements with minimum straight lengths of pipe upstream and downstream from element as prescribed by manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Install wafer-orifice-type flow elements between two pipe flanges.

E. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable flowmeters in accessible locations.

F. Install permanently mounted meters for flow elements on walls or brackets in accessible locations.




G. Install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow elements and meters as prescribed by manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 FLOWMETER INSTALLATION

A. Install flowmeters and components according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 WATER METER INSTALLATION

A. Install water meters, piping, and specialties according to AWWA M6 and utility's requirements.

1. Install displacement-type water meters with shutoff valve on water meter inlet. Install valve on water meter outlet and valved bypass around meter, unless prohibited by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Install compound-type water meters with shutoff valves on water meter inlet and outlet and on valved bypass around meter. Support meters, valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers.

3. Install detector-type water meters with shutoff valves on water meter inlet and outlet and on full-size valved bypass around meter. Support meter, valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers.

3.7 ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METERS

A. Install roughing-in piping and specialties for water meter installation according to utility's instructions and requirements.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:

1. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance.

2. Connect flow-measuring-system elements to meters. 3. Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters. 4. Connect thermal-energy-flowmeter transmitters to meters.

B. Make electrical connections to power supply and electrically operated meters and devices.

C. Ground electrically operated meters.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

D. Install electrical connections for power and devices.

E. Electrical power, wiring, and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.




3.9 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions, after installation.

B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

C. Clean windows of meters and gages and clean factory-finished surfaces. Replace cracked and broken windows, and repair scratched and marred surfaces with manufacturer's touchup paint.




DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140 - 1

SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Under-building-slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, and fittings inside buildings.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for water-service piping outside the building from source to the point where water-service piping enters the building.

2. Refer

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. System purging and disinfecting activities report.

B. Field quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61.

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) water tube, drawn temper.




B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A) water tube, annealed temper.

C. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

D. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

E. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

F. Copper Unions:

1. MSS SP-123. 2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body. 3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces. 4. Solder-joint or threaded ends.

G. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following :

a. Elkhart Products Corporation. b. NIBCO Inc. c. Viega.

3. Fittings for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber, O-ring seal in each end.

4. Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber, O-ring seal in each end.

2.3 SPECIALTY VALVES

A. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty metal valves.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for balancing valves, drain valves, backflow preventers, and vacuum breakers.

C. CPVC Union Ball Valves:


a. American Valve, Inc. b. Asahi/America, Inc. c. Colonial Engineering, Inc. d. Fischer, George Inc. e. Hayward Flow Control Systems; Hayward Industrial Products, Inc. f. IPEX Inc. g. NIBCO INC. h. Sloane, George Fischer, Inc. i. Spears Manufacturing Company. j. Thermoplastic Valves Inc.

2. Description:




a. Standard: MSS SP-122. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) at [73 deg F (23 deg C)]. c. Body Material: CPVC. d. Body Design: Union type. e. End Connections for Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Detachable, socket. f. End Connections for Valves NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Detachable,

flanged. g. Ball: CPVC; full port. h. Seals: PTFE or EPDM-rubber O-rings. i. Handle: Tee shaped.

2.4 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe:

1. AWWA C151/A21.51, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.

2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

B. Standard-Pattern, Mechanical-Joint Fittings:

1. AWWA C110/A21.10, ductile or gray iron. 2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber

gaskets, and steel bolts.

C. Compact-Pattern, Mechanical-Joint Fittings:

1. AWWA C153/A21.53, ductile iron. 2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber

gaskets, and steel bolts.

2.15 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. General Requirements:

1. Same size as pipes to be joined. 2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined; but not less than 150 psig design

working pressure with restraints. 3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined. 4. In compliance with State and local codes and acceptable to Local Authorities Having

Jurisdiction.

C. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.

2.16 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:




1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following :

a. Capitol Manufacturing Company; member of the Phoenix Forge Group. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. Jomar International. e. Matco-Norca. f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. g. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. h. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

3. Standard: ASSE 1079. 4. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). 5. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:


a. Capitol Manufacturing Company; member of the Phoenix Forge Group. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Matco-Norca. d. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

3. Standard: ASSE 1079. 4. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. 5. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) . 6. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint

copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

3. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. 4. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) . 5. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. 6. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. 7. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

E. Dielectric Nipples:





a. Elster Perfection Corporation. b. Grinnell Mechanical Products; Tyco Fire Products LP. c. Matco-Norca. d. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. e. Victaulic Company.

3. Standard: IAPMO PS 66. 4. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545. 5. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C) . 6. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. 7. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.

D. Install underground copper tube and ductile-iron pipe in PE encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A21.5.

E. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve inside the building at each domestic water-service entrance. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" and with requirements for drain valves and strainers in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

F. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

G. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with requirements for pressure-reducing valves in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

H. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.

I. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements.




J. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

K. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

L. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

M. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

N. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

O. Install piping free of sags and bends.

P. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

R. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.

S. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping for each plumbing pump and packaged booster pump. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages."

T. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements for thermostats in Division 15 Section "Water Distribution Pumps."

U. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements for thermometers in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages."

V. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping.” Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping.” Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply withrequirements for escutcheons specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping.”

W. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

X. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

Y. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

Z. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" chapter.




AA. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

BB. Pressure-Sealed Joints for Copper Tubing: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.

CC. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

DD. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

EE. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. Apply primer.

2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.

3.4 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping: 2. Fittings for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Sleeve-type couplings with restraints.

3.5 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples .

C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100) : Use dielectric flange kits .

D. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.


A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m) if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.




3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch (10 mm).

E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 (DN 20) and Smaller: 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4 (DN 25 and DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)

rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)

rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 5. NPS 3 to NPS 5 (DN 80 to DN 125): 10 feet (3 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 6. NPS 6 (DN 150): 10 feet (3 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod. 7. NPS 8 (DN 200): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.

F. Install vinyl-coated hangers for CPVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: 36 inches (900 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2 (DN 32 to DN 50): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 3. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm)

rod. 4. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm)

rod. 5. NPS 6 (DN 150): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod. 6. NPS 8 (DN 200): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod.

G. Install supports for vertical CPVC piping every 60 inches (1500 mm) for NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller, and every 72 inches (1800 mm) for NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) and larger.

H. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).

U. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.




D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following:

1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.

2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than that required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements for connection sizes in Division 15 plumbing fixture Sections.

3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and installation in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Piping Inspections:

a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:

1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.

2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Piping Tests:

a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.




d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.10 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide hot-water flow in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and are clean and ready for use. 8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm (50 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm (200 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.




c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Clean non-potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods are not prescribed, follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

3.12 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

D. Under-building-slab, domestic waterservice-main piping, NPS 6 to NPS 12 (DN 150 to DN 300), shall be the following:

1. Mechanical-joint, ductile-iron pipe; standard- or compact-pattern, mechanical-joint fittings; and restrained mechanical joints.

E. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller , shall be one of the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) ; cast- or wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints.

2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) ; copper pressure-seal-joint fittings; and pressure-sealed joints.

F. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100) , shall be one of the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) ; cast- or wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints.

2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) ; copper pressure-seal-joint fittings; and pressure-sealed joints.

3. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) ; grooved-joint, copper-tube appurtenances; and grooved joints.




3.13 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use butterfly, ball, or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use butterfly or ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

3. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves. 4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.








DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 15145 - 1

SECTION 15145 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:

1. Vacuum breakers. 2. Backflow preventers. 3. Water pressure-reducing valves. 4. Balancing valves. 5. Temperature-actuated water mixing valves. 6. Strainers. 7. Outlet boxes. 8. Hose stations. 9. Hose bibbs. 10. Wall hydrants. 11. Ground hydrants. 12. Drain valves. 13. Water hammer arresters.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig (860 kPa), unless otherwise indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.





A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. NSF Compliance:

1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic domestic water piping components.

2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers.


a. Ames Co. b. Cash Acme. c. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. e. Rain Bird Corporation. f. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div. g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1001. 3. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3 (DN 8 to DN 80), as required to match connected piping. 4. Body: Bronze. 5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded. 6. Finish: Chrome plated.

B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


a. Arrowhead Brass Products, Inc. b. Cash Acme. c. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. Legend Valve. e. MIFAB, Inc. f. Prier Products, Inc. g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.




h. Woodford Manufacturing Company. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. j. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

3. Standard: ASSE 1011. 4. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain. 5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7. 6. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated.

2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers:



a. Cash Acme. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d. Honeywell Water Controls. e. Legend Valve. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

3. Standard: ASSE 1012. 4. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 5. Size: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) NPS 3/4 (DN 20). 6. Body: Bronze. 7. End Connections: Union or solder joint.

B. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:


a. Ames Co. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d. Flomatic Corporation. e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1013. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Pressure Loss: 12 psig (83 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with

AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved or stainless steel for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.




7. Accessories:

a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

b. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.

C. Double-Check Backflow-Prevention Assemblies


a. Ames Co. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d. Flomatic Corporation. e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1015. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (35 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with

AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved or stainless steel for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

7. Accessories:

a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

D. Dual-Check-Valve Backflow Preventers:


a. Cash Acme. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d. Flomatic Corporation. e. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The). f. Honeywell Water Controls. g. Legend Valve. h. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. i. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. j. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. k. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1024. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Body: Bronze with union inlet.




E. Double-Check, Detector-Assembly Backflow Preventers:


a. Ames Co. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1048 and FMG approved or UL listed. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (35 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 5. Body: Cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved

or Stainless steel. 6. End Connections: Flanged. 7. Accessories:

a. Valves: Outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet. b. Bypass: With displacement-type water meter, shutoff valves, and reduced-

pressure backflow preventer.

F. Hose-Connection Backflow Preventers


a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. c. Woodford Manufacturing Company.

2. Standard: ASSE 1052. 3. Operation: Up to 10-foot head of water (30-kPa) back pressure. 4. Inlet Size: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20). 5. Outlet Size: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 6. Capacity: At least 3-gpm (0.19-L/s) flow.

G. Backflow-Preventer Test Kits:


a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. c. Flomatic Corporation. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with test-procedure instructions.




2.3 WATER PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES

A. Water Regulators::


a. Cash Acme. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. Honeywell Water Controls. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1003. 3. Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig (1035 kPa). 4. Body: Bronze with chrome-plated finish for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with

interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80).

5. Valves for Booster Heater Water Supply: Include integral bypass. 6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and

NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80).

2.4 BALANCING VALVES

A. Copper-Alloy Calibrated Balancing Valves:


a. Armstrong International, Inc. b. Flo Fab Inc. c. ITT Industries; Bell & Gossett Div. d. NIBCO INC. e. TAC Americas. f. Taco, Inc. g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

2. Type: Ball or Y-pattern globe valve with two readout ports and memory setting indicator. 3. Body: Brass or bronze. 4. Size: Same as connected piping, but not larger than NPS 2 (DN 50). 5. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.

B. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves:


a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. Hammond Valve. f. Milwaukee Valve Company.




g. NIBCO INC. h. Red-White Valve Corp.

2. Standard: MSS SP-110 for two-piece, copper-alloy ball valves. 3. Pressure Rating: 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP. 4. Size: NPS 2 (DN 50) or smaller. 5. Body: Copper alloy. 6. Port: Standard or full port. 7. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 8. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 9. End Connections: Solder joint or threaded. 10. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel with memory-setting device.

2.5 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED WATER MIXING VALVES

A. Manifold, Thermostatic, Water-Mixing-Valve Assemblies:


a. Leonard Valve Company. b. Powers; a Watts Industries Co. c. Symmons Industries, Inc. d. Lawler

2. Description: Factory-fabricated, exposed-mounting, thermostatically controlled, water-mixing-valve assembly in two valve parallel arrangement.

3. Large-Flow Parallel: Thermostatic water mixing valve and downstream pressure regulator with pressure gages on inlet and outlet.

4. Intermediate-Flow Parallel: Thermostatic water mixing valve and downstream pressure regulator with pressure gages on inlet and outlet.

5. Small-Flow Parallel: Thermostatic water mixing valve. 6. Thermostatic Mixing Valves: Comply with ASSE 1017. Include check stops on hot- and

cold-water inlets and shutoff valve on outlet. 7. Water Regulator(s): Comply with ASSE 1003. Include pressure gage on inlet and outlet. 8. Component Pressure Ratings: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 9. Thermostatic Mixing Valve and Water Regulator Finish: Rough bronze. 10. Piping Finish: Copper.

2.6 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with

AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating and for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2

(DN 65) and larger. 4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Perforation Size:

a. Strainers 2 (DN 50) and smaller: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm.




b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100 0.062 inch (1.57 mm).

6. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.

2.7 OUTLET BOXES

A. Clothes Washer Outlet Boxes:



a. Acorn Engineering Company. b. Guy Gray Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. IPS Corporation. d. LSP Products Group, Inc. e. Oatey. f. Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies. g. Symons Industries, Inc. h. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. i. Whitehall Manufacturing; a div. of Acorn Engineering Company. j. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.

3. Mounting: Recessed. 4. Material and Finish: Enameled-steel or epoxy-painted-steel box and faceplate. 5. Faucet: Combination valved fitting or separate hot- and cold-water, valved fittings

complying with ASME A112.18.1. Include garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 on outlets.

6. Supply Shutoff Fittings: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) gate, globe, or ball valves and NPS 1/2 (DN 15) copper, water tubing.

7. Drain: NPS 2 (DN 50) standpipe and P-trap for direct waste connection to drainage piping.

8. Inlet Hoses: Two 60-inch- (1500-mm-) long, rubber household clothes washer inlet hoses with female, garden-hose-thread couplings. Include rubber washers.

9. Drain Hose: One 48-inch- (1200-mm-) long, rubber household clothes washer drain hose with hooked end.

B. Icemaker Outlet Boxes:


a. Acorn Engineering Company. b. IPS Corporation. c. LSP Products Group, Inc. d. Oatey. e. Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies.

2. Mounting: Recessed. 3. Material and Finish: Enameled-steel or epoxy-painted-steel box and faceplate.




4. Faucet: Valved fitting complying with ASME A112.18.1. Include NPS 1/2 (DN 15) or smaller copper tube outlet.

5. Supply Shutoff Fitting: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) gate, globe, or ball valve and NPS 1/2 (DN 15) copper, water tubing.

2.8 HOSE BIBBS

A. Hose Bibbs:

1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets. 2. Body Material: Bronze. 3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable. 4. Supply Connections: NPS 3/4 (DN 20) threaded or solder-joint inlet. 5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa). 7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral[ or field-installation, nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection

vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011. 8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated. 9. Finish for Service Areas: Chrome or nickel plated. 10. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated. 11. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle. 12. Operation for Service Areas: Wheel handle or Operating key. 13. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key. 14. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb. 15. Include wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.

2.9 WALL HYDRANTS

A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants:


a. Josam Company. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Prier Products, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. f. Watts Drainage Products Inc. g. Woodford Manufacturing Company. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for exposed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa). 4. Operation: Loose key. 5. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall

clamp. 6. Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1 (DN 20 or DN 25). 7. Nozzle and Wall-Plate Finish: Polished nickel bronze. 8. Operating Keys(s): One with each wall hydrant.




2.10 GROUND HYDRANTS

A. Nonfreeze Ground Hydrants:


a. Josam Company. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Murdock, Inc. d. Prier Products, Inc. e. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. f. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. g. Watts Drainage Products Inc. h. Woodford Manufacturing Company. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. j. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M. 3. Type: Nonfreeze, concealed-outlet ground hydrant with box. 4. Operation: Loose key. 5. Casing and Operating Rod: Of at least length required for burial of valve below frost line. 6. Inlet: NPS 3/4 (DN 20). 7. Outlet: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 8. Drain: Designed with hole to drain into ground when shut off. 9. Box: Standard pattern with cover. 10. Box and Cover Finish: Rough nickel. 11. Operating Key(s): One with each ground hydrant. 12. Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1011.

2.11 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20). 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel. 8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7

and cap with brass chain.

B. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for ball valves or MSS SP-80 for gate valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 200-psig (1380-kPa) minimum CWP or Class 125. 3. Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20). 4. Body: Copper alloy or ASTM B 62 bronze. 5. Drain: NPS 1/8 (DN 6) side outlet with cap.




2.12 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water Hammer Arresters:


a. AMTROL, Inc. b. Josam Company. c. MIFAB, Inc. d. PPP Inc. e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. g. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. h. Watts Drainage Products Inc. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201. 3. Type: Metal bellows or Copper tube with piston. 4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Common Work Results for Mechanical" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. 2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap

fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application.

3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

C. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass with memory-stop balancing valve. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.

D. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.

E. Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet.

1. Install thermometers and water regulators if specified. 2. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.

F. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valve, water pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, and pump.




G. Install outlet boxes recessed in wall. Install 2-by-4-inch (38-by-89-mm) fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking wall reinforcement between studs. Fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking is specified in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."

H. Install ground hydrants with 1 cu. yd. (0.75 cu. m) of crushed gravel around drain hole. Set ground hydrants with box flush with grade.

I. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.

B. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

C. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following:

1. Pressure vacuum breakers. 2. Intermediate atmospheric-vent backflow preventers. 3. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers. 4. Double-check backflow-prevention assemblies. 5. Dual-check-valve backflow preventers. 6. Reduced-pressure-detector, fire-protection backflow-preventer assemblies. 7. Water pressure-reducing valves. 8. Calibrated balancing valves. 9. Manifold, thermostatic, water-mixing-valve assemblies.

B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."


A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:

1. Test each pressure vacuum breaker, reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer [double-check backflow-prevention assembly and double-check, detector-assembly backflow preventer according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified above.




3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.

B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.

C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves.








SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150 - 1

SECTION 15150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Specialty pipe fittings.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 2 Section "Sanitary Sewage" for sanitary sewage piping and structures outside the building.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.




A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service and Extra Heavy classes.

B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

2.3 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: CISPI 301 .

1. CISPI301, Hubless-Piping Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal housing, corrosion-resistant fasteners, and ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. Include gasket.

a. Heavy-Duty, Type 304, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel shield; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve.

1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 3-inch-wide shield with 4 bands. 2) NPS 5 to NPS 10: 4-inch-wide shield with 6 bands.

b. Heavy-Duty, Cast-Iron Couplings: ASTM A 48, 2-piece, cast-iron housing; stainless-steel bolts and nuts; and sleeve. Include gasket.

c. Heavy-Duty, Type 301, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 301, stainless-steel shield; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve. Include sealing sleeve.

1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 3-inch-wide shield with 4 bands. 2) NPS 5 to NPS 10: 4-inch-wide shield with 6 bands.

d. Compact, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310 with ASTM A 167, Type 301, or ASTM A 666, Type 301, stainless-steel corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve. Include sealing sleeve.

1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 2-1/8-inch-wide shield with 2 bands. 2) NPS 5 and NPS 6: 3-inch-wide shield with 4 bands. 3) NPS 8 and NPS 10: 4-inch-wide shield with 4 bands. 4) NPS 12 and NPS 15: 5-1/2-inch-wide shield with 6 bands.

2. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Class 150; hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal, bronze seating surface; and female threaded ends.

2.6 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.




B. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper, solder-joint fittings.

1. ABS solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 325 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.8 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

B. Cellular-Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40.

C. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.

D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.

2.9 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Transition Couplings:

1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined.

a. Standard: ASTM C 1173. b. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include

shear ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

c. Sleeve Materials:

1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.

2. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:

a. Standard: ASTM C 1460. b. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant

outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTH MOVING

A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."




3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

B. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

C. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

D. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

E. Install piping free of sags and bends.

F. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

G. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

H. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may beused on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

I. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

J. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

K. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

L. Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

M. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665.

N. Plumbing Specialties:

1. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary drainage force-main piping. Comply with




requirements for cleanouts specified in Division 15 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

2. Install drains in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Division 15 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

O. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

P. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 15 Section "Common Work Results for Mechanical."

Q. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 15 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

R. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 15 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

T. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 15 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.

B. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

D. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern.

E. Plastic, Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes.




3.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Transition Couplings:

1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's. 2. In Drainage Piping: non-pressure transition couplings.

3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. General valve installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."


A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments. 2. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments. 3. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 4. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:

a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m) if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

5. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

6. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches (300 mm) of each fitting, valve, and coupling.

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum rods.

E. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.

2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm)



rod. 6. Spacing for 10-foot (3-m) lengths may be increased to 10 feet (3 m). Spacing for fittings

is limited to 60 inches (1500 mm).




F. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).

G. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.

2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm)



rod.

H. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches (1200 mm).

I. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor.

5. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment.

E. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.




3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg (250 Pa). Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.




C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

D. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex paint.

3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground, soil, waste and vent piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range subject to local plumbing codes and health codes, PVC piping shall not be used in any air plenum:

1. NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 1-1/2 (DN 32 and DN 40):

a. Use NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints and one of the following:

1) Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 301 or 304, stainless steel. 2) Couplings: Heavy-duty, FMG approved or cast iron.

b. Use copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints; except do not use where located in partition stud spaces.

2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and larger:

a. Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints. b. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, hubless-piping couplings; and coupled

joints and one of the following:

1) Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 301 or 304, stainless steel. 2) Couplings: Heavy-duty, FMG approved or cast iron.

3. Concealed Piping: Solid wall or cellular-core PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-

cemented joints.

C. Underground, soil, waste and vent piping shall be any of the following,:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints.

2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints and one of the following:

a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel. b. Couplings: Heavy-duty, FMG approved or cast iron.




SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 15155 - 1

SECTION 15155 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties:

1. Backwater valves. 2. Cleanouts. 3. Floor drains. 4. Floor sinks. 5. Roof flashing assemblies. 6. Through-penetration firestop assemblies. 7. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties. 8. Flashing materials.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

B. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

C. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.

D. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

E. PP: Polypropylene plastic.

F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.




B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary piping specialty components.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BACKWATER VALVES

A. Drain-Outlet Backwater Valves:



a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. Smith, Jay R. Mfr. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. c. Watts Drainage Products Inc. d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

3. Size: Same as floor drain outlet. 4. Body: Cast iron or bronze made for vertical installation in bottom outlet of floor drain. 5. Check Valve: Removable ball float. 6. Inlet: Threaded. 7. Outlet: Threaded or spigot.

2.2 CLEANOUTS

A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts:


a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. g. Josam Company; Blucher-Josam Div.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping




4. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe or T-branch Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.

5. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head brass plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 7. Closure: Stainless-steel plug with seal.

B. Metal Floor Cleanouts:


a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. Oatey. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. f. Watts Drainage Products Inc. g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. i. Josam Company; Josam Div. j. Kusel Equipment Co. k. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. l. Josam Company; Blucher-Josam Div.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for threaded, adjustable housing cleanout. 3. Size: Same as connected branch. 4. Type: Threaded, adjustable housing. 5. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron. 6. Clamping Device: Required. 7. Outlet Connection: Inside calk, Spigot or Threaded. 8. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket or Brass plug with tapered threads. 9. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads or set-screws. 10. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy, Polished bronze or

Stainless steel. 11. Frame and Cover Shape: Round in areas other than ceramic tile floors. Square in araas

with ceramic tile floors. 12. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout. 13. Standard: ASME A112.3.1. 14. Size: Same as connected branch. 15. Housing: Stainless steel. 16. Closure: Stainless steel with seal. 17. Riser: Stainless-steel drainage pipe fitting to cleanout.

C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:


a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.




e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 4. Body: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 5. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head brass plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 7. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw.

2.3 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains:


a. Commercial Enameling Co. b. Josam Company; Josam Div. c. MIFAB, Inc. d. Prier Products, Inc. e. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. f. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. g. Watts Drainage Products Inc. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3. 3. Pattern: As scheduled on the drawings. 4. Body Material: Gray iron. 5. Seepage Flange: Required. 6. Clamping Device: Required. 7. Outlet: Bottom. 8. Top or Strainer Material: Bronze, Nickel bronze or Stainless steel. 9. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze, polished bronze or Stainless steel. 10. Top Shape: Round in areas other than ceramic tile floors. Square in araas with ceramic

tile floors. 11. Funnel: Where noted on the drawings. 12. Trap Material: Cast iron. 13. Trap Pattern: Deep Seal P-trap.

2.4 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES

A. Roof Flashing Assemblies:


a. Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Div. b. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd.




B. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch- (1.6-mm) thick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 8 inches (200 mmfrom pipe, with galvanized-steel boot reinforcement and counter flashing fitting.

1. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap.

2.5 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES

A. Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies:


a. ProSet Systems Inc.

2. Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug. 3. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack. 4. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing

flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs. 5. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with neoprene

O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC protective cap for plug.

6. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Open Drains:

1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where required, increaser fitting joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.

B. Air-Gap Fittings:

1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping.

2. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 3. Inlet: Opening in top of body. 4. Outlet: Larger than inlet. 5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated

indirect waste piping.

C. Stack Flashing Fittings:

1. Description: Counter flashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

D. Frost-Resistant Vent Terminals:




1. Description: Manufactured or shop-fabricated assembly constructed of copper, lead-coated copper, or galvanized steel.

2. Design: To provide 1-inch (25-mm) enclosed air space between outside of pipe and inside of flashing collar extension, with counter flashing.

E. Expansion Joints:

1. Standard: ASME A112.21.2M. 2. Body: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland. 3. End Connections: Matching connected piping. 4. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent piping.

2.7 FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:

1. General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness. 2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-lb/sq. ft. (15-kg/sq. m), 0.0469-inch (1.2-mm) thickness. 3. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch (2.4-mm) thickness.

B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, of the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:

1. General Applications: 12 oz./sq. ft. (3.7 kg/sq. m or 0.41-mm) thickness. 2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz./sq. ft. (2.5 kg/sq. m or 0.27-mm) thickness.

C. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-inch (1.01-mm) minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 (Z275) hot-dip galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.

D. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil (1.01-mm) minimum thickness.

E. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.

F. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.

G. Solder: ASTM B 32, 100% lead-free alloy.

H. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.

2.8 MOTORS

A. General requirements for motors are specified in Division 15 Section "Common Motor Requirements for Mechanical Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.




2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONCRETE BASES

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Common Work Results for Mechanical" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide cleanout deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to remove valve cover for servicing.

C. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4 (DN 100). Use NPS 4 (DN 100) for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller and

100 feet (30 m) for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

D. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.

E. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

F. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set

with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:

a. Radius, 30 Inches (750 mm) or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch (6.35-mm) total depression.

b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches (750 to 1500 mm): Equivalent to 1 percent slope. c. Radius, 60 Inches (1500 mm) or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not

greater than 1-inch (25-mm) total depression.

3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.




H. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.

I. Install through-penetration firestop assemblies at floor penetrations.

J. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 2 inches (51 mm) above floor.

K. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping discharge into sanitary drainage system.

L. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane.

M. Install frost-resistant vent terminals on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch (25-mm) clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.

N. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy access and maintenance.

O. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties.

P. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated.

3.3 CONNECTIONS


B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Grease Interceptors: Connect inlet and outlet to unit, and connect flow-control fitting and vent to unit inlet piping. Install valve on outlet of automatic drawoff-type unit.

D. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

E. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.4 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:

1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch (2.4-mm) thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness or thinner.

2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.

B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.




1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches (250 mm), and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around pipe.

2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around sleeve.

3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around specialty.

C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counter flashing or commercially made flashing fittings, according to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.

G. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.

3.5 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."



1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.


3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.








REFRIGERANT PIPING 15183 - 1

SECTION 15183 - REFRIGERANT PIPING

1.1 GENERAL A. Submittals

1. Product Data: Include pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for thermostatic

expansion valves, solenoid valves, and pressure-regulating valves. 2. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube,

and fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, oil traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial relationship between piping and equipment. a. Refrigerant piping indicated is schematic only. Size piping and design the actual

piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes, to ensure proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment.

B. ASHRAE Standard: Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration." C. ASME Standard: Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping." D. UL Standard: Provide products complying with UL 207, "Refrigerant-Containing Components

and Accessories, Nonelectrical"; or UL 429, "Electrically Operated Valves." 1.2 PRODUCTS

A. Copper Tube and Fittings

1. Drawn-Temper Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR or ASTM B 88, Type L

(ASTM B 88M, Type B). 2. Annealed-Temper Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR, ASTM B 88, Type L

(ASTM B 88M, Type B), or ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A). 3. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22. 4. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22. 5. Bronze Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-1 (silver) or BAg-2 (silver).

B. Valves: The contractor/supplier may use any of the following types of valves as required for

proper system operation. Coordinate with plans, equipment manufacturer, mechanical contractor, and tempereature control contractor to determine proper valve application and type. 1. Diaphragm Packless Valves: 500-psig (3450-kPa) working pressure and 275 deg F (135

deg C) working temperature; globe design with straight-through or angle pattern; forged-brass or bronze body and bonnet, phosphor bronze and stainless-steel diaphragms, rising stem and handwheel, stainless-steel spring, nylon seat disc, and with solder-end connections.

2. Packed-Angle Valves: 500-psig (3450-kPa) working pressure and 275 deg F (135 deg C) working temperature; forged-brass or bronze body, forged-brass seal caps with copper gasket, back seating, rising stem and seat, molded stem packing, and with solder-end connections.

3. Check Valves Smaller Than NPS 1 (DN 25): 400-psig (2760-kPa) operating pressure and 285 deg F (141 deg C) operating temperature; cast-brass body, with removable piston,




polytetrafluoroethylene seat, and stainless-steel spring; globe design. Valve shall be straight-through pattern, with solder-end connections.

4. Check Valves, NPS 1 (DN 25) and Larger: 400-psig (2760-kPa) operating pressure and 285 deg F (141 deg C) operating temperature; cast-bronze body, with cast-bronze or forged-brass bolted bonnet; floating piston with mechanically retained polytetrafluoroethylene seat disc. Valve shall be straight-through or angle pattern, with solder-end connections.

5. Service Valves: 500-psig (3450-kPa) pressure rating; forged-brass body with copper stubs, brass caps, removable valve core, integral ball check valve, and with solder-end connections.

6. Solenoid Valves: Comply with ARI 760; 250 deg F (121 deg C) temperature rating and 400-psig (2760-kPa) working pressure; forged brass, with polytetrafluoroethylene valve seat, 2-way, straight-through pattern, and solder-end connections; manual operator; fitted with suitable NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location, with 1/2-inch (16-GRC) conduit adapter, 24 or 120-V as requiredfor equipment, normally closed or open holding coil as required for proper operation.

7. Pressure-Regulating Valves: Comply with ARI 770; pilot operated, forged brass or cast bronze, stainless-steel bottom spring, pressure-gage tappings, 24-V dc standard coil, and wrought-copper fittings for solder-end connections; suitable for refrigerant specified.

8. Pressure-Regulating Valves: Comply with ARI 770; direct acting, brass; with pilot operator, stainless-steel diaphragm, standard coil, and solder-end connection; suitable for refrigerant specified.

9. Pressure Relief Valves: Straight-through or angle pattern, brass body and disc, neoprene seat, and factory sealed and ASME labeled for standard pressure setting.

10. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750; brass body with stainless-steel parts; thermostatic-adjustable, modulating type; size and operating characteristics as recommended by manufacturer of evaporator, and factory set for superheat requirements; solder-end connections; with sensing bulb, distributor having side connection for hot-gas bypass line, and external equalizer line.

11. Hot-Gas Bypass Valve: Pulsating-dampening design, stainless-steel bellows and polytetrafluoroethylene valve seat; adjustable; sized for capacity equal to last step of compressor unloading; with solder-end connections.

C. Refrigerant Piping Specialities: Provide the following:

1. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750; brass body with stainless-steel parts; thermostatic-adjustable, modulating type; size and operating characteristics as recommended by manufacturer of evaporator, and factory set for superheat requirements; solder-end connections; with sensing bulb, distributor having side connection for hot-gas bypass line, and external equalizer line.

2. Hot-Gas Bypass Valve: Pulsating-dampening design, stainless-steel bellows and polytetrafluoroethylene valve seat; adjustable; sized for capacity equal to last step of compressor unloading; with solder-end connections.

3. Straight- or Angle-Type Strainers: 500-psig (3450-kPa) working pressure; forged-brass or steel body with stainless-steel wire or brass-reinforced Monel screen of 80 to 100 mesh in liquid lines up to 1-1/8 inches (30 mm), 60 mesh in larger liquid lines, and 40 mesh in suction lines; with screwed cleanout plug and solder-end connections.

4. Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 500-psig (3450-kPa) maximum working pressure and 200 deg F (93 deg C) operating temperature; all-brass body with replaceable, polished, optical viewing window with color-coded moisture indicator; with solder-end connections.

5. Replaceable-Core Filter-Dryers (10 ton and larger): 500-psig (3450-kPa) maximum working pressure; heavy gage protected with corrosion-resistant-painted steel shell, flanged ring and spring, ductile-iron cover plate with steel cap screws; wrought-copper




fittings for solder-end connections; with replaceable-core kit, including gaskets and the following:

a. Filter-Dryer Cartridge: Pleated media with solid-core sieve with activated alumina, ARI 730 rated for capacity.

6. Permanent Filter-Dryer (less than 10 ton): 350-psig (2410-kPa) maximum operating pressure and 225 deg F (107 deg C) maximum operating temperature; steel shell and wrought-copper fittings for solder-end connections; molded-felt core surrounded by desiccant.

7. Mufflers: 500-psig (3450-kPa) operating pressure, welded-steel construction with fusible plug; sized for refrigeration capacity.

D. Receivers

1. Receivers, 6-Inch (150-mm) Diameter and Smaller: ARI 495, UL listed, steel, brazed,

400-psig (2760-kPa) pressure rating, with tappings for inlet, outlet, and pressure relief valve.

2. Receivers Larger Than 6-Inch (150-mm) Diameter: ARI 495, welded steel, tested and stamped according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII; 400-psig (2760-kPa) pressure rating, with tappings for liquid inlet and outlet valves, pressure relief valve, and liquid-level indicator.

E. Refrigerants: ASHRAE 34, R-123 (dichlorotrifluoroethane), R-134a (tetrafluoroethane), R-22

(monochlorodifluoromethane), or R-500 (azeotrope) as indicated on equipment schedules. 1.3 EXECUTION

A. Piping Applications

1. Aboveground, within Building: Type ACR drawn-copper tubing or Type L (Type B) drawn-

copper tubing. 2. Belowground for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type L (Type B) or Type K (Type A)

annealed-copper tubing. B. Valve Applications: Provide any of the following as required for proper system operation.

Coordinate with manufacturer, mechancial contractor, and temperature control contractor. 1. Install diaphragm packless or packed-angle valves in suction and discharge lines of

compressor, for gage taps at hot-gas bypass regulators, on each side of strainers. 2. Install check valves in compressor discharge lines and in condenser liquid lines on

multiple condenser systems. 3. Install packed-angle valve in liquid line between receiver shutoff valve and thermostatic

expansion valve for system charging. 4. Install diaphragm packless or packed-angle valves on each side of strainers and dryers,

in liquid and suction lines at evaporators, and elsewhere as indicated. 5. Install a full-sized, three-valve bypass around each dryer. 6. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve.

a. Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top. b. Provide and coordinate electrical requirements and connections for solenoid

valves. 7. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to evaporator.




a. If refrigerant distributors are used, install them directly on expansion-valve outlet. b. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb. c. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb

straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line. d. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect

suction-line pressure at bulb location. 8. Install pressure-regulating and pressure relief valves as required by ASHRAE 15. Pipe

pressure relief valve discharge to outside. C. Specialty Applications Provide the following as required for proper system operation.

Coordinate with maufacturer, machanical contractor, and temperature control contractor: 1. Install liquid indicators in liquid line leaving condenser, in liquid line leaving receiver, and

on leaving side of liquid solenoid valves. 2. Install strainers immediately upstream from each automatic valve, including expansion

valves, solenoid valves, hot-gas bypass valves, and compressor suction valves. 3. Install strainers in main liquid line where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers

are used. 4. Install strainers in suction line of steel pipe. 5. Install moisture-liquid indicators in liquid lines between filter-dryers and thermostatic

expansion valves and in liquid line to receiver. 6. Install pressure relief valves on ASME receivers; pipe discharge to outdoors. 7. Install replaceable-core filter-dryers in vertical liquid line adjacent to receivers and before

each solenoid valve. 8. Install permanent filter-dryers in low-temperature systems, in systems using hermetic

compressors, and before each solenoid valve. 9. Install solenoid valves in liquid line of systems operating with single pump-out or pump-

down compressor control, in liquid line of single or multiple evaporator systems, and in oil bleeder lines from flooded evaporators to stop flow of oil and refrigerant into suction line when system shuts down.

10. Install receivers, sized to accommodate pump-down charge, on systems 5 tons (17.5 kW) and larger and on systems with long piping runs.

11. Install flexible connectors at or near compressors where piping configuration does not absorb vibration.

D. Piping Installation

1. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15. 2. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic

Mechanical Materials and Methods." 3. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows,

and fittings. 4. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of compressor and other equipment.

Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. 5. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or

between pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full-thickness insulation.

6. Belowground, install copper tubing in protective conduit. Vent conduit outdoors. 7. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be

exposed to mechanical injury. 8. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:

a. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away

from compressor. b. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.




c. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs. Size suction riser piping as required by manufacturer.

d. Liquid lines may be installed level. 9. Install bypass around moisture-liquid indicators in lines larger than NPS 2 (DN 50). 10. Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure-regulating valves, and

expansion valves and at connections to compressors and evaporators. 11. When brazing, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems,

seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near expansion valve bulb.

12. Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."

13. Install the following pipe attachments: a. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet (6.0

m) long. b. Roller hangers and spring hangers for piping over 2” diamenter and individual

horizontal runs 20 feet (6.0 m) or longer. c. Pipe rollers for piping over 2” diamenter and multiple horizontal runs 20 feet (6.0 m)

or longer, supported by a trapeze. d. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

14. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod

sizes: a. NPS 1/2 (DN 15): Maximum span, 60 inches (1500 mm); minimum rod size, 1/4

inch (6.4 mm). b. NPS 5/8 (DN 18): Maximum span, 60 inches (1500 mm); minimum rod size, 1/4

inch (6.4 mm). c. NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 72 inches (1800 mm); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch

(6.4 mm). d. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): Maximum span, 96 inches (2400 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8

inch (9.5 mm). e. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): Maximum span, 96 inches (2400 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8

inch (9.5 mm). f. NPS 2 (DN 50): Maximum span, 96 inches (2400 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch

(9.5 mm). g. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Maximum span, 108 inches (2700 mm); minimum rod size,

3/8 inch (9.5 mm). h. NPS 3 (DN 80): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (9.5

mm). i. NPS 4 (DN 100): Maximum span, 12 feet (3.7 m); minimum rod size, 1/2 inch (13

mm). 15. Support vertical runs at each floor.

16. Pipe Joint Construction: a. Braze joints according to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and

Methods." b. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) during brazing to

prevent scale formation. E. Test and inspect refrigerant piping according to ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.




1. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser, evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure.

2. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system at not less than the lower of the design pressure or the setting of pressure relief device protecting high and low side of system. a. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of

test. b. Test joints and fittings by brushing a small amount of soap and glycerine solution

over joint. c. Fill system with nitrogen to raise a test pressure of 150 psig (1035 kPa) or higher

as required by authorities having jurisdiction. d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are

achieved. F. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat requirements. G. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating

suction pressure. H. Adjust set-point temperature of the conditioned air or chilled-water controllers to the system

design temperature. I. Before installing copper tubing other than Type ACR, clean tubing and fittings with

trichloroethylene. J. Replace core of filter-dryer after system has been adjusted and design flow rates and pressures

are established. K. Charge system using the following procedures:

1. Install core in filter-dryer after leak test but before evacuation. 2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to a vacuum of 500 micrometers

(67 Pa). If vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging. 3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig (14 kPa). 4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line. Provide full-operating charge.

L. Insulation: Provide insulation on refrigerant suction and hot-gas piping. Insulate all associated

pipe fittings, expansion joints, valves, etc. 1. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber preformed, flexible elastomeric, polyolefin. All insulation

jacket and fittings shall be plenum rated for 25/50 flame/smoke ASTM-#84 vapor barrier jacket. Seal all joints, seams, and ends with vapor-retarder mastic.

2. Thickness:

Mineral Fiber - 1 ½” Flexible Elastomeric - 1” Polyolefin - 1”








FUEL GAS PIPING 15194 - 1

SECTION 15194 - FUEL GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes fuel gas piping, specialties, and accessories within the building.

1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Low Pressure Gas Piping System: One pressure range. Operating pressure is 0.5 psig or less.

B. Medium Pressure Gas Piping System: Operating pressure is more than 0.5 psig but not more than 2.0 psig.

C. Design values of fuel gas supplied for these systems are as follows:

1. Nominal Heating Value: 1000 Btu/cu. ft. 2. Nominal Specific Gravity: 0.6.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Specialty valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of selected models.

2. Service meters. Include pressure rating and capacity of selected models. 3. Pressure regulators. Include pressure rating, capacity, and settings of selected models. 4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

B. Field quality-control test reports.

C. Operation and maintenance data.



B. ANSI Standard: Comply with ANSI Z223.1, "National Fuel Gas Code."

C. FMG Standard: Provide components listed in FMG's "Fire Protection Approval Guide" if specified to be FMG approved.

D. IAS Standard: Provide components listed in IAS's "Directory of A. G. A. and C. G. A Certified Appliances and Accessories" if specified to be IAS listed.

E. UL Standard: Provide components listed in UL's "Gas and Oil Equipment Directory" if specified to be UL listed.




1.5 COORDINATION

A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner/Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner/Engineer's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; Type E or S; Grade B; Schedule 40; black.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.

2. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.

3. Cast-Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Class 125. 4. Steel Welding Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel or ASME B16.11, forged steel. 5. Steel Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.11, forged steel with threaded ends according to

ASME B1.20.1. 6. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas. 7. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5. 8. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for natural gas.

B. Transition Fittings: Type, material, and end connections to match piping being joined.

C. Common Joining Materials: Refer to Division 15 Section "Common Work Results for Mechanical" for joining materials not in this Section.

2.2 PROTECTIVE COATING

A. Furnish pipe and fittings with factory-applied, corrosion-resistant polyethylene coating for use in corrosive atmosphere.

2.3 SPECIALTIES

A. Flexible Connectors: ANSI Z21.24, copper alloy.

B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: ANSI Z21.41, convenience outlets and matching plug connector.

2.4 VALVES

A. Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe threads.

B. Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel flanges and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges.




C. Appliance Connector Valves: ANSI Z21.15 and IAS listed.

D. Gas Stops: Bronze body with AGA stamp, plug type with bronze plug and flat or square head, ball type with chrome-plated brass ball and lever handle, or butterfly valve with stainless steel disc and fluorocarbon elastomer seal and lever handle; 2-psig (13.8-kPa) minimum pressure rating.

E. Gas Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: ASME B16.33 and IAS-listed bronze body and 125-psig (860-kPa) pressure rating.

F. Plug Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: ASME B16.38 and MSS SP-78 cast-iron lubricated plug valves, with 125-psig (860-kPa) pressure rating.

G. General-Duty Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: MSS SP-70, ASME B16.38, cast-iron body gate valves, OS&Y type with solid wedge, suitable for fuel gas service, with "WOG" indicated on valve body, and 125-psig (860-kPa) pressure rating.

H. Electrically Operated Gas Valves: UL 429, bronze, aluminum, or cast-iron body solenoid valve; 120-V ac, 60 Hz, Class B, continuous-duty molded coil. Include NEMA ISC 6, Type 4, coil enclosure and electrically opened and closed dual coils. Valve position shall normally be closed.

2.5 METERS

A. Service Meters: As required by utility provider.

B. Pressure Regulators: Single stage and suitable for fuel gas service. Include steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components, elevation compensator, and atmospheric vent.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Line Pressure Regulators:

1) American Meter Co. 2) Donkin, Bryan Donkin RMG Canada, Ltd. 3) Eclipse Combustion, Inc. 4) Equimeter, Inc. 5) Fisher Controls International, Inc. 6) Maxitrol Co. 7) National Meter. 8) Richards Industries, Inc.; Jordan Valve Div. 9) Schlumberger Industries; Gas Div.

2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe threads.

3. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel flanges and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges.

4. Line Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.80 with 2-psig- (13.8-kPa-) minimum inlet pressure rating.

C. Pressure Regulator Vents: Factory- or field-installed, corrosion-resistant screen in opening if not connected to vent piping.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Flanges, unions, transition, and special fittings with pressure ratings same as or higher than system pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Natural Gas Piping, 2.0 psig or Less: Use the following:

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. 2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints. 3. Larger Than NPS 4: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints.

C. Natural Gas Piping, 2.0 to 5 psig: Use the following:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints.

D. Underground Fuel Gas Piping: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints. Encase in containment conduit.

E. Containment Conduits: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints.

F. Gas Service Piping at Meters and Regulators, Above 5 psig: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints.

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa) or Less: Appliance connector valve or gas stop.

B. Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 to 2 psig (3.45 to 13.8 kPa): Gas stop or gas valve.

C. Piping Line Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Gas valve.

D. Piping Line Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Plug valve or general-duty valve.

E. Valves at Service Meter, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Gas valve.

F. Valves at Service Meter, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Plug valve.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Common Work Results for Mechanical" for basic piping installation requirements and piping joint construction.

B. Install service-meter assemblies aboveground as required by utility provider. Coordinate location of service meter and pressure regulators with building openings and air intake openings as required by the local codes, NFPA and local utility provider.

1. Install gas valve or plug valve and strainer upstream from each service pressure regulator.




2. Install service pressure regulators with vent outlet turned down and with corrosion-resistant-metal insect screen.

3. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each service pressure regulator. 4. Install service meters with connections NPS 1 and smaller on meter bars. 5. Install service meters with connections larger than NPS 1 supported from piping or set on

concrete bases.

C. Service Entrance Piping: Extend fuel gas piping and connect to fuel gas distribution for service entrance to building.

1. Exterior fuel gas distribution system piping, service pressure regulator, and service meter will be provided by gas utility.

2. Install dielectric fitting downstream from and adjacent to each service meter unless meter is supported from service-meter bar with integral dielectric fitting. Install shutoff valve downstream from and adjacent to dielectric fitting. Refer to Division 15 Section "Common Work Results for Mechanical" for dielectric fittings.

D. Concealed Locations: Except as specified below, install concealed gas piping in airtight conduit constructed of Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe with welded joints. Vent conduit to outside and terminate with screened vent cap.

1. Above-Ceiling Locations: Gas piping may be installed in accessible spaces, subject to approval of authorities having jurisdiction, whether or not such spaces are used as plenums. Do not locate valves above ceilings.

2. In Partitions: Do not install concealed piping in solid partitions. Protect tubing from physical damage when installed inside partitions or hollow walls.

3. In Walls: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping specified in "Protective Coating" Article in Part 2 may be installed in masonry walls, subject to approval of authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts.

E. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Include outlets of service meters. Locate where readily accessible for cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate would be subject to freezing.

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use minimum-length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long, and same size as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip and floor for removal of plug or cap.

F. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels, unless indicated to be exposed to view.

G. Install fuel gas piping at uniform grade of 0.1 percent slope upward toward risers.

H. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.

I. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

J. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices.




K. Install strainer on inlet of each line pressure regulator and automatic and electrically operated valve.

L. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each line pressure regulator.

M. Install flanges on valves, specialties, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger connections.

N. Install vent piping for gas pressure regulators and gas trains, extend outside building, and vent to atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion-resistant insect screens in large end.

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices.

B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches (2438 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).

2. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): Maximum span, 108 inches (2743 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).

3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): Maximum span, 108 inches (2743 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).

4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 1/2 inch (13 mm).

5. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 5/8 inch (16 mm).

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance. Connect piping to appliances using gas with shutoff valves and unions. Install valve upstream from and within 72 inches of each appliance. Install union downstream from valve.


A. Inspect, test, and purge piping according to ANSI Z223.1, Part 4 "Inspection, Testing, and Purging," and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory results are obtained.








PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410 - 1

SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and related components.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with disabilities.

B. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty valves are included where indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports and indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates for each type of fixture indicated.

B. Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category through one source from a single manufacturer.

1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that category.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.




C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; about plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS), 1985-494-187" about plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.

F. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

G. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible.

H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures:

1. Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M. 2. Hand Sinks: NSF 2 construction. 3. Plastic Mop-Service Basins: ANSI Z124.6. 4. Plastic Sinks: ANSI Z124.6. 5. Porcelain-Enameled, Formed-Steel Fixtures: ASME A112.19.4M. 6. Stainless-Steel Fixtures Other Than Service Sinks: ASME A112.19.3M. 7. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M. 8. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5. 9. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.

I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory and sink faucets:

1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME A112.18.3M. 2. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME A112.18.3M. 3. Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025. 4. Faucet Hose: ASTM D 3901. 5. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1M. 6. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011. 7. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 8. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 9. NSF Materials: NSF 61. 10. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 11. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951. 12. Supply and Drain Fittings: ASME A112.18.1M.

J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for bathtub and shower faucets:

1. Backflow Protection Devices for Hand-Held Showers: ASME A112.18.3M. 2. Combination, Pressure-Equalizing and Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets:

ASSE 1016. 3. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1M. 4. Hand-Held Showers: ASSE 1014.




5. High-Temperature-Limit Controls for Thermal-Shock-Preventing Devices: ASTM F 445. 6. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 7. Manual-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444. 8. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 9. Pressure-Equalizing-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016. 10. Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.

K. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous fittings:

1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1M. 3. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037. 4. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951. 5. Tubular Brass Drainage Fittings and Piping: ASME A112.18.1M.

L. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components:

1. Floor Drains: ASME A112.21.1M. 2. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446. 3. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 4. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M. 5. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 6. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5. 7. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate roughing-in and final plumbing fixture locations, and verify that fixtures can be installed to comply with original design and referenced standards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work are limited to the manufacturers specified.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following.

1. China. Kohler, American Standard, Crane, Eljer. 2. Fiberglass. Aqua Glass, Kohler, Clarion, Universal Rundle, Swan. 3. Flush Valves. Sloan, Zurn, Toto. 4. Seats. Beneke, Bemis, Church, Centoco, Kohler. 5. Stainless Steel. Elkay, Just,. 6. Brass shall meet NSF Standard 61 Section 9. Chicago, T & S, Delta-Cambridge,

Speakman, Symmons. 7. Drinking Fountains shall meet NSF Standard 61 Section 9. Haws, Halsey Taylor,

Sunrock, Elkay, Oasis, White-Westinghouse, Acorn.




8. Under Sink Pipe Protectors. Truebro, Prowrap, Plumberex. 9. Mop Basins: Fiat, Mustee. 10. Shower Valves: Lawler, Powers, Symmons, Delta-Cambridge, Leonard. 11. FixturesSloan 12. China Plumbing Fixtures – Zurn 13. Faucets – Zurn 14. Shower Valves – Zurn 15. Mop Basins – Zurn 16. Wall Hydrants - Zurn

2.2 GENERAL

A. The exposed flush, waste, and supply pipes at the fixtures shall be chromium-plated brass pipe, iron pipe size. Fittings and traps for brass pipe shall be cast brass, chromium-plated.

B. Install chromium-plated brass or stainless steel wall or floor plates with set screw where piping passes through walls or floors.

C. Where reference is made to chromium-plated brass, same shall mean polished brass, first nickel-plated and finished with chromium plate.

D. Provide faucets, stops, and traps for all fixtures and equipment.

E. All lavatories and drinking fountains shall be furnished with 3/8-inch SPS flexible tube supply pipes, 1/2" x 3/8" loose key stops and escutcheons, unless specified otherwise.

F. All lavatories, drinking fountains, and sinks shall be furnished with 1 1/4-inch tailpiece, 1 1/2-inch cast brass chrome-plated "P" trap with C.O., 17 gauge tubing waste to wall and escutcheons, unless otherwise specified.

G. All fixtures fitted to the walls or floor shall be ground square and true and be sealed with a non-hardening white silicon caulk bead, with Engineer's approval.

H. Provide Wade, Zurn, J.R. Smith, or Josam carriers or wall hangers, specified below, to support all wall hung fixtures independent of wall. Carriers shall be secured to structural floor slab with anchor bolts. Carriers shall be designed for chase space allowed on architectural plans.

1. Water Closet. Short foot supports, integral stack fitting, auxiliary inlets and vent connections as required, adjustable to mounting heights indicated. Carriers for single water closets shall have an anchor foot on the back side of carrier in addition to foot supports.

2. Wall hung sinks, urinals. Floor mounted, chrome fixture bolts, hanger and bearing plates for attaching upper back cast iron wall hanger brackets and lower backbolts, etc., steel pipe uprights with block bases.

3. Lavatories (institutional). Floor mounted, chrome fixture bolts, hanger and bearing plates for attaching upper back cast iron wall hanger brackets and lower backbolts, etc., steel pipe uprights with block bases.

I. The following schedule establishes the standards to which each type of fixture must conform and the plumbing fixture portfolios shall completely illustrate and describe each type. Refer to the drawings for exact quantities of fixtures scheduled in the following.




NOTE: Where there is no standard of quality specified, fixtures shall match identically existing units in the same area. Verify mounting heights from Architectural Details.

2.3 FIXTURES

A. See the Schedule on the Plans. Not all "P numbers" may appear on each project.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for water, waste, and vent piping systems. Verify support types, sizes, and actual locations match those required. Verify actual locations and sizes of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation. Use manufacturer's roughing-in data for fixtures provided.

B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.


3.2 FIXTURE INSTALLATION

A. Assemble fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions.

B. For wall-hanging fixtures, install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate.

1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures. 2. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.

C. Install back-outlet, wall-hanging fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.

D. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building substrate.

E. Install wall-hanging fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.

F. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.

G. Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturers' written instructions and roughing-in drawings.

H. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valve if stops are not specified with fixture. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves.

I. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to sanitary drainage system.




J. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage system.

K. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach.

L. Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of compartment.

M. Install toilet seats on water closets.

N. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

O. Install water-supply, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves.

P. Install faucet, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

Q. Install shower, flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.

R. Install traps on fixture outlets.

1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps. 2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.

S. Install disposer in outlet of sinks indicated to have disposer. Install switch where indicated or in wall adjacent to sink if location is not indicated.

T. Install escutcheons at piping wall or ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Refer to Division 15 Section "Common Work Results for Mechanical" for escutcheons.

U. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealant and installation requirements.

3.3 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect water supplies from water distribution piping to fixtures.

C. Connect drain piping from fixtures to drainage piping.

D. Supply and Waste Connections to Plumbing Fixtures: Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, risers, traps, and waste piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures. Connect to plumbing piping.




E. Supply and Waste Connections to Fixtures and Equipment Specified in Other Sections: Connect fixtures and equipment with water supplies, stops, risers, traps, and waste piping specified. Use size fittings required to match fixtures and equipment. Connect to plumbing piping.

F. Ground equipment.



A. Verify that installed fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.

B. Check that fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.

C. Inspect installed fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly.

E. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls.

B. Operate and adjust disposers, hot-water dispensers, and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning units and controls.

C. Adjust water pressure at faucets, shower valves, and flushometer valves to produce proper flow and stream.

D. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Do the following:

1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and spouts.

2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.




B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.




DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS 15415 - 1

SECTION 15415 - DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following water coolers and related components:

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible Drinking Fountain or Water Cooler: Fixture that can be approached and used by people with disabilities.

B. Cast Polymer: Dense, cast-filled-polymer plastic.

C. Drinking Fountain: Fixture with nozzle for delivering stream of water for drinking.

D. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of fixture.

E. Fixture: Drinking fountain or water cooler unless one is specifically indicated.

F. Remote Water Cooler: Electrically powered equipment for generating cooled drinking water.

G. Water Cooler: Electrically powered fixture for generating and delivering cooled drinking water.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each fixture indicated. Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.






B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; “Americans with Disabilities Act"; for fixtures for people with disabilities.

C. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

D. ARI Standard: Comply with ARI's "Directory of Certified Drinking Water Coolers" for style classifications.

E. ARI Standard: Comply with ARI 1010, "Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers," for water coolers and with ARI's "Directory of Certified Drinking Water Coolers" for type and style classifications.

F. ASHRAE Standard: Comply with ASHRAE 34, "Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants," for water coolers. Provide HFC 134a (tetrafluoroethane) refrigerant, unless otherwise indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRESSURE WATER COOLERS

A. Water Coolers,:


a. Elkay Manufacturing Co. b. Halsey Taylor. c. Haws Corporation. d. Oasis Corporation. e. Sunroc Corp.

2. Description: See product description on plans.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before fixture installation. Verify that sizes and locations of piping and types of supports match those indicated.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.





3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Use carrier off-floor supports for wall-mounting fixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use mounting frames for recessed water coolers, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Set freestanding and pedestal drinking fountains on floor.

D. Set remote water coolers on floor, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Use chrome-plated brass or copper tube, fittings, and valves in locations exposed to view. Plain copper tube, fittings, and valves may be used in concealed locations.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate and attach wall-mounting fixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install mounting frames affixed to building construction and attach recessed water coolers to mounting frames, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install fixtures level and plumb. For fixtures indicated for children, install at height required by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Use ball, gate, or globe valve. Install valves in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. Valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."

E. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage system.

F. Install pipe escutcheons at wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 15 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

G. Seal joints between fixtures and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.4 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.

C. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

D. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."





A. Water Cooler Testing: After electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

1. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 2. Report test results in writing.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.

B. Adjust water cooler temperature settings.

3.7 CLEANING

A. After completing fixture installation, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.




PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 1

SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 1.1 GENERAL

A. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on plumbing specialties made to specified

standards. B. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.

1.2 PRODUCTS

A. Backflow Preventers, General: ASSE standard, of size indicated for maximum flow rate and

maximum pressure loss indicated. 1. 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. 2. 2-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65) and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, steel, or stainless-steel body with

flanged ends. a. Interior Lining: AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating for backflow

preventers having cast-iron or steel body. 3. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials. 4. Exterior Finish: Polished chrome-plate if used in chrome-plated piping system. 5. Strainer on inlet, if indicated.

B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011, nickel plated, with nonremovable and manual

drain features, and ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads on outlet. Units attached to rough-bronze-finish hose connections may be rough bronze.

C. Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1012, suitable for continuous

pressure application. Include inlet screen and 2 independent check valves with intermediate atmospheric vent.

D. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1013, suitable for continuous pressure

application. Include outside screw and yoke gate valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet; test cocks; and pressure-differential relief valve with ASME A112.1.2 air-gap fitting located between 2 positive-seating check valves. 1. Pressure Loss: 12 psig (83 kPa) maximum, through middle one-third of flow range.

E. Double-Check Backflow Prevention Assemblies: ASSE 1015, suitable for continuous pressure

application. Include shutoff valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet; and test cocks with 2 positive-seating check valves. 1. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (35 kPa) maximum, through middle one-third of flow range.

F. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves, 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: MSS SP-110, ball valve,

rated for 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP. Include 2-piece, ASTM B 62 bronze body with standard port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, solder-joint ends, and vinyl-covered steel handle with memory-stop device.




G. Strainers: Y-pattern, unless otherwise indicated, and full size of connecting piping. Include ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel screens with 3/64-inch (1.2-mm) round perforations, unless otherwise indicated. Include screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown. 1. Pressure Rating: 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum steam working pressure, unless

otherwise indicated. 2. 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: Bronze body, with female threaded ends. 3. 2-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65) and Larger: Cast-iron body, with interior AWWA C550 or FDA-

approved epoxy coating and flanged ends. H. Wall Hydrants: ASME A112.21.3M or ASSE 1019, nonfreeze, automatic draining, antibackflow

type, key operation, with 3/4-inch NPS (DN20) inlet, and ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads on outlet. Include operating key for each hydrant. 1. Type: Recessed. 2. Finish: Nickel bronze.

I. Hose-End Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, 3/4-inch NPS (DN20) ball valve, rated for 400-psig

(2760-kPa) minimum CWP. Include 2-piece, ASTM B 62 bronze body with standard port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle. 1. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 2. Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose thread and cap.

J. Water Hammer Arresters: ASME A112.26.1M, ASSE 1010, or PDI-WH 201, bellows or piston

type with pressurized cushioning chamber. Sizes are based on water-supply fixture units, ASME A112.26.1M sizes A through F and PDI-WH 201 sizes A through F.

K. Hose Bibbs: Bronze body, with renewable composition disc, 1/2- or 3/4-inch NPS (DN15 or

DN20) threaded or solder-joint inlet. Provide ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads on outlet and integral or field-installed, nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker. Include chrome- or nickel-plated finish and wheel-handle operation.

L. Stack Flashing Fittings: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for

terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe. M. Lead-Sheet Flashing: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum

weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated: 1. General Use: 4 lb/sq. ft. or 0.0625-inch thickness (20 kg/sq. m or 1.6-mm thickness). 2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3 lb/sq. ft. or 0.0469-inch thickness (15 kg/sq. m or 1.2-mm

thickness). 3. Burning: 6 lb/sq. ft. or 0.0937-inch thickness (30 kg/sq. m or 2.4-mm thickness).

N. Flashing Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened. O. Metal Flashing Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar

accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed. P. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy. Q. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.




1.3 EXECUTION A. General: Install plumbing specialty components, connections, and devices according to

manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated, at each water-supply connection

to mechanical equipment and systems, and to other equipment and water systems as indicated. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment. Install air-gap fitting on units with atmospheric-vent connection and pipe relief outlet drain to nearest floor drain. Do not install bypass around backflow preventer.

C. Install strainers where indicated. D. Install hose bibbs with integral or field-installed vacuum breaker. E. Install wall hydrants with integral or field-installed vacuum breaker. F. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping as indicated, and where not

indicated, according to the following: 1. Size same as drainage piping up to 4-inch NPS (DN100). Use 4-inch NPS (DN100) for

larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) for piping 4-inch NPS (DN100) and smaller

and 100 feet (30 m) for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

G. Install cleanout deck plates, of types indicated, with top flush with finished floor, for floor

cleanouts for piping below floors. H. Install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished

wall, for cleanouts located in concealed piping. I. Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through floors

with waterproof membrane. J. Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing

according to manufacturer's written instructions. K. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with

finished floor or as indicated. Size outlets as indicated. L. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. M. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise

indicated. N. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining

flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. O. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. P. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's written

installation instructions. Size outlets as indicated.




Q. Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

R. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance. S. Install interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting, according to authorities

having jurisdiction and with clear space for servicing. 1. Flush with Floor Installation: Set unit and extension if required, with cover flush with

finished floor. 2. Install cleanout immediately downstream from interceptors not having integral cleanout on

outlet. T. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing specialties securely to supports attached to building substrate if

supports are specified and to building wall construction if no support is indicated. U. Secure supplies to supports or substrate. V. Install individual stop valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball, gate, or globe

valve if specific valve is not indicated. W. Install water-supply stop valves in accessible locations. X. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is

indicated. Y. Locate drainage piping as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures and

drains. Z. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and

within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.

AA. Include wood-blocking reinforcement for recessed and wall-mounting plumbing specialties. AB. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate

general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. Install piping connections between plumbing specialties and piping specified in other

Division 15 Sections. 2. Install piping connections indicated between appliances and equipment specified in other

Sections; connect directly to plumbing piping systems. 3. Install piping connections indicated as indirect wastes from appliances and equipment

specified in other Sections, to spill over receptors connected to plumbing piping systems. AC. Install hoses between plumbing specialties and appliances as required for connections. AD. Supply Runouts to Plumbing Specialties: Install hot- and cold-water-supply piping of sizes

indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. AE. Drainage Runouts to Plumbing Specialties: Install drainage and vent piping, with approved trap,

of sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.




AF. Grease Interceptors: Connect inlet and outlet piping to unit, and flow-control fitting and vent to unit inlet piping.

AG. Fabricate flashing manufactured from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. 1. Burn joints of lead sheets where required. 2. Solder joints of copper sheets where required. 3. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in

floors and roofs with waterproof membrane. a. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches

(2500 mm), and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around pipe. b. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches

(200 mm) around sleeve. c. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8

inches (200 mm) around specialty. AH. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement. AI. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device. AJ. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing

into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess. AK. Before startup, perform the following checks:

1. System tests are complete. 2. Damaged and defective specialties and accessories have been replaced or repaired. 3. Clear space is provided for servicing specialties.

AL. Before operating systems, perform the following steps:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open general-duty valves to fully open position. 3. Remove and clean strainers. 4. Verify that drainage and vent piping are clear of obstructions. Flush with water until clear.

AM. Adjust operation and correct deficiencies discovered. AN. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and

to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. AO. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.








WATER DISTRIBUTION PUMPS 15441 - 1

SECTION 15441 - WATER DISTRIBUTION PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes pumps for the building potable-water systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities of selected models; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories for each type and size of pump specified. Indicate pumps' operating point on curves.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and connections for pumps. Include setting drawings with templates, directions for installation of foundation and anchor bolts, and other anchorages.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Maintenance Data: For each pump specified to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of pumps through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections, and dimensional requirements of pumps and are based on specific manufacturer types and models indicated. Other manufacturers' pumps with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.

B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Compact Circulators:

a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Grundfos Pumps Corp. c. ITT Fluid Technology Corp.; ITT Bell & Gossett Div. d. Taco, Inc.

2. In-Line Circulators:

a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Crane Pumps & Systems, Inc.; Weinman Div. d. ITT Fluid Technology Corp.; ITT Bell & Gossett Div. e. Mepco f. Taco, Inc. g. Thrush, Inc.

2.2 PUMPS, GENERAL

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, single-stage, centrifugal pump units; complying with UL 778; suitable for potable-water service; with all-bronze or stainless-steel construction and components in contact with water made of corrosion-resistant materials.

B. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors" with built-in thermal-overload protection appropriate for motor size and duty.

C. End Connections for NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded. Pumps available only with flanged ends may be furnished with threaded companion flanges.

D. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested units before shipping.

F. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles.

2.3 COMPACT CIRCULATORS

A. Description: Horizontal, in-line, replaceable-cartridge-design circulator; rated for 125-psig minimum working pressure and minimum continuous water temperature of 225 deg F.




1. Pump and Motor Assembly: On common shaft in hermetically sealed unit without stuffing box or mechanical seal, and with manufacturer's standard cooling and lubrication system.

2. Impeller: Corrosion-resistant material. 3. Motor: Single speed, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 IN-LINE CIRCULATORS

A. Description: Horizontal in-line circulator, rated for 125-psig minimum working pressure and minimum continuous water temperature of 225 deg F.

1. Construction: Radially split, all-bronze casing. 2. Impeller: ASTM B 36/B 36M, rolled brass; or ASTM B 584, cast bronze; overhung, single

suction, and keyed to shaft. 3. Seal: Mechanical. 4. Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft, with oil-lubricated copper sleeve. 5. Pump Bearings: Oil-lubricated, bronze-journal or thrust type. 6. Shaft Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft

misalignment. 7. Motor: Single speed, with oil-lubricated bearings, unless otherwise indicated; and

resiliently mounted to pump casing.

a. Motor Size: For motors larger than 1/2 hp, select motor size that will not overload through full range of pump performance curve.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water distribution piping to verify actual locations of connections before pump installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions and with access for periodic maintenance, including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.

B. Support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps.

C. Suspend horizontal in-line pumps independent of piping. Use continuous-thread hanger rods and vibration isolation hangers of sufficient size to support pump weight. Fabricate brackets or supports as required. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for materials.

D. Suspend vertical in-line pumps independent of piping. Use continuous-thread hanger rods and vibration isolation hangers of sufficient size to support pump weight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for materials.




3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:

1. Connect water distribution piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge pipe equal to or greater than size of pump nozzles. Refer to Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping."

2. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of pumps, and check valve and throttling valve on discharge side of pumps. Install valves same size as connected piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves and Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for strainers.

3. Install pressure gages at suction and discharge of pumps. Install at integral pressure-gage tappings where provided or install pressure-gage connectors in suction and discharge piping around pumps. Refer to Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for pressure gages and gage connectors.

B. Electrical wiring and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.

C. Ground equipment.


3.4 START-UP

A. Check suction piping connections for tightness.

B. Clean strainers on suction piping.

C. Controls: Set for automatic starting and stopping operation.

D. Final Checks before Starting: Perform the following preventive maintenance operations:

1. Lubricate oil-lubricated-type bearings. 2. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquids is free to

rotate with pump hot and cold. Do not operate pump if it is bound or drags, until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.

3. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.

E. Starting procedure for pumps is as follows:

1. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for operation.

2. Open circulating line valve if pump should not be operated against dead shutoff. 3. Start motor. 4. Open discharge valve slowly. 5. Check general mechanical operation of pump and motor. 6. Close circulating line valve once there is sufficient flow through pump to prevent

overheating.




3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain pumps as specified below:

1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining pumps.

2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." 3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and

Maintenance Data." 4. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.








WATER SOFTENERS 15469 - 1

SECTION 15469 - WATER SOFTENERS

PART 1 - GENERAL





1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for water softeners.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

3. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

B. Source quality-control reports.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water softeners to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Salt for Brine Tanks: Furnish in same form as and at least four times original load, but not less than 200 lb (90.7 kg).

2. Store salt on raised platform where directed by Owner. Do not store in contact with concrete floor.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended application.




B. ASME Compliance for Steel Tanks: Fabricate and label mineral tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, where indicated.

C. ASME Compliance for FRP Tanks: Fabricate and label mineral tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section X, where indicated.

D. UL Compliance: Fabricate and label water softeners to comply with UL 979, "Water Treatment Appliances."

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of water softeners that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures of mineral and brine tanks. b. Faulty operation of controls. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use. d. Attrition loss of resin exceeding 3 percent per year. e. Mineral washed out of system during service run or backwashing period. f. Effluent turbidity greater and color darker than incoming water. g. Fouling of underdrain system, gravel, and resin with turbidity or by dirt, rust, or

scale from water softener or soft water, while operating according to manufacturer's written operating instructions.

2. Residential Water Softeners, Warranty Period: From date of Substantial Completion.

a. Tanks: Five years. b. Control Valve: Two year(s).

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of water softener Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper water softener operation at rated capacity. Provide parts and supplies the same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.

B. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RESIDENTIAL WATER SOFTENERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Culligan International Company. 2. EcoWater Systems, LLC. 3. WaterSoft; a division of Amtrol, Inc.

B. Description: Factory-assembled, fully automatic, pressure-type water softener.

1. Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects." 2. Configuration: Unit with one mineral tank and one brine tank or cabinet-style,

combination mineral and brine tank unit with equivalent characteristics. 3. Mineral Tank: Steel or FRP, with coating or liner suitable for potable-water service and

125-psig (860-kPa) minimum pressure rating. 4. Controls: For fully automatic operation. 5. Brine Tank: Combination measuring and wet-salt storing system.

a. Tank and Cover Material: FRP or molded PE. b. Brine Valve: Float operated and plastic fitted for automatic control of brine

withdrawal and freshwater refill. c. Size: Large enough for at least two regenerations at full salting.

6. Factory-Installed Accessories:

a. Piping, valves, tubing, and drains. b. Sampling cock. c. Main-operating-valve position indicator.

C. Capacities and Characteristics: See schedule on drawings.

2.2 CHEMICALS

A. Mineral: High-capacity, sulfonated-polystyrene, ion-exchange resin that is stable over entire pH range with good resistance to bead fracture from attrition or shock.

1. Exchange Capacity: 30,000 grains/cu. ft. (69 kg/cu. m) of calcium carbonate of resin when regenerated with 15 lb (6.8 kg) of salt.

B. Salt for Brine Tanks: High-purity sodium chloride, free of dirt and foreign material. Rock and granulated forms are unacceptable.

2.3 WATER-TESTING SETS

A. Description: Manufacturer's standard water-hardness testing apparatus and chemicals with testing procedure instructions. Include metal container suitable for wall mounting.




2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Hydrostatically test mineral tanks before shipment to a minimum of one and one-half times the pressure rating.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER SOFTENER INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting: Install residential water softeners on floor.

1. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. 2. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install water softeners on concrete base.

1. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. 2. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible. 3. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise

indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

4. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

5. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

6. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 7. Anchor water softener and brine tanks to substrate.

C. Install brine lines and fittings furnished by equipment manufacturer but not specified to be factory installed.

D. Prepare mineral-tank distribution system and underbed for minerals and place specified mineral into mineral tanks.

E. Install water-testing sets mounted on wall, unless otherwise indicated, and near water softeners.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where piping is installed adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment.

C. Install shutoff valves on raw-water inlet and soft-water outlet piping of each mineral tank, and on inlet and outlet headers.

1. Metal general-duty valves are specified in Division 15 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."




2. Plastic valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping." 3. Exception: Water softeners with factory-installed shutoff valves at locations indicated.

D. Install pressure gages on raw-water inlet and soft-water outlet piping of each mineral tank. Pressure gages are specified in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

1. Exception: Water softeners with factory-installed pressure gages at locations indicated. 2. Exception: Household water softeners. 3. Exception: Water softeners in hot-water service.

E. Install valved bypass in water piping around water softeners.

1. Metal general-duty valves are specified in Division 15 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

2. Plastic valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping." 3. Water piping is specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping." 4. Exception: Household water softeners. 5. Exception: Water softeners in hot-water service.

F. Install drains as indirect wastes to spill into open drains or over floor drains.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 15 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."




2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.


B. Water softeners will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Add water to brine tanks and fill with the proper form of salt:




C. Sample water softener effluent after startup and at three consecutive seven-day intervals (total of four samples), and prepare certified test reports for required water performance characteristics. Comply with the following:

1. ASTM D 859, "Test Method for Silica in Water." 2. ASTM D 1067, "Test Methods for Acidity or Alkalinity of Water." 3. ASTM D 1068, "Test Methods for Iron in Water." 4. ASTM D 1126, "Test Method for Hardness in Water." 5. ASTM D 1129, "Terminology Relating to Water." 6. ASTM D 3370, "Practices for Sampling Water from Closed Conduits."

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain water softeners.




FUEL-FIRED WATER HEATERS 15486 - 1

SECTION 15486 - FUEL-FIRED WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Gas-fired, tankless, domestic-water heaters. 2. Domestic-water heater accessories.


A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic-water heater indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.


B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Fabricate and label fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters to comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

C. ASME Compliance:

1. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial, domestic-water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

2. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial, finned-tube, domestic-water heaters to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV.




D. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with potable water to comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects."

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports. b. Faulty operation of controls. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.

a. Gas-Fired, Tankless, Domestic-Water Heaters:

1) Heat Exchanger: Five years. 2) Controls and Other Components: Three years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GAS-FIRED, TANKLESS, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Bradford White Corporation. 2. Rheem Manufacturing Company; Rheem Water Heating. 3. Rinnai Corporation. 4. Smith, A. O. Water Products Co.; a division of A. O. Smith Corporation. 5. State Industries.

B. Standard: ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3 for gas-fired, instantaneous, domestic-water heaters for indoor application.

C. Construction: Copper piping or tubing complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable water, without storage capacity.

1. Tappings: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread. 2. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). 3. Heat Exchanger: Copper tubing. 4. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. 5. Jacket: Metal, with enameled finish, or plastic.




6. Burner: For use with tankless, domestic-water heaters and natural-gas fuel. 7. Automatic Ignition: Manufacturer's proprietary system for automatic, gas ignition. 8. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.

D. Support: Bracket for wall mounting.

E. Capacity and Characteristics: See Schedule on Drawings.

2.2 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

A. Domestic-Water Compression Tanks:

1. Description: Steel, pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-installed butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-operating pressure at tank.

2. Construction:

a. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling. Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.

c. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.

B. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Comply with ANSI/CSA LC 3. Include dimensions not less than base of domestic-water heater, and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4 (DN 20) with ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads or with ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads.

C. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

D. Heat-Trap Fittings: ASHRAE 90.2.

E. Manifold Kits: Domestic-water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated inlet and outlet piping for field installation, for multiple domestic-water heater installation. Include ball-, butterfly-, or gate-type shutoff valves to isolate each domestic-water heater and memory-stop balancing valves to provide balanced flow through each domestic-water heater.

1. Comply with requirements for ball-, butterfly-, or gate-type shutoff valves specified in Division 15 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

2. Comply with requirements for balancing valves specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

F. Gas Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.15/CSA 9.1-M, manually operated. Furnish for installation in piping.

G. Gas Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18/CSA 6.3, appliance type. Include pressure rating as required to match gas supply.

H. Automatic Gas Valves: ANSI Z21.21/CSA 6.5, appliance, electrically operated, on-off automatic valve.




I. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than domestic-water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

1. Gas-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4-M. 2. Oil-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ASME rated and stamped.

J. Pressure Relief Valves: Include pressure setting less than domestic-water heater working-pressure rating.

1. Gas-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4-M. 2. Oil-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ASME rated and stamped.

K. Vacuum Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4-M.

L. Domestic-Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel bracket for wall mounting, capable of supporting domestic-water heater and water.


A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect assembled domestic-water heaters specified to be ASME-code construction, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

B. Hydrostatically test commercial domestic-water heaters and storage tanks to minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating before shipment.

C. Domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for retesting and reinspecting requirements and Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for requirements for correcting the Work.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Tankless, Domestic-Water Heater Mounting: Install tankless, domestic-water heaters on wall bracket.

1. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. 2. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 5. Anchor domestic-water heaters to substrate.

B. Install domestic-water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.




1. Install shutoff valves on domestic-water-supply piping to domestic-water heaters and on domestic-hot-water outlet piping. Comply with requirements for shutoff valves specified in Division 15 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

C. Install gas-fired, domestic-water heaters according to NFPA 54.

1. Install gas shutoff valves on gas supply piping to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters without shutoff valves.

2. Install gas pressure regulators on gas supplies to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters without gas pressure regulators if gas pressure regulators are required to reduce gas pressure at burner.

3. Install automatic gas valves on gas supplies to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters if required for operation of safety control.

4. Comply with requirements for gas shutoff valves, gas pressure regulators, and automatic gas valves specified in Division 15 Section "Fuel Gas Piping."

D. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

E. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in water piping for domestic-water heaters without storage. Extend commercial-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

F. Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for domestic-water heaters that do not have tank drains. Comply with requirements for hose-end drain valves specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

G. Install thermometer on outlet piping of domestic-water heaters. Comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages."

H. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple domestic-water heaters. Fabricate, modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each domestic-water heater. Include shutoff valve and thermometer in each domestic-water heater inlet and outlet, and throttling valve in each domestic-water heater outlet. Comply with requirements for valves specified in Division 15 Section "Valves" and comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages."

I. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of domestic-water heater storage tanks without integral or fitting-type heat traps.

J. Fill domestic-water heaters with water.

K. Charge domestic-water compression tanks with air.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for domestic-water piping specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping."




B. Comply with requirements for gas piping specified in Division 15 Section "Fuel Gas Piping."

C. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

D. Where installing piping adjacent to fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters, allow space for service and maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal of domestic-water heaters.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."


A. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.


3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper operation.


B. Domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for retesting and reinspecting requirements and Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for requirements for correcting the Work.


3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain domestic-water heaters.




FURNACES 15530 - 1

SECTION 15530 - FURNACES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Gas-fired, condensing furnaces and accessories complete with controls. 2. Air filters. 3. Refrigeration components.


A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for each of the following:

1. Furnace. 2. Thermostat. 3. Air filter. 4. Refrigeration components.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each furnace to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals for each of the following:

1. Furnace and accessories complete with controls. 2. Air filter. 3. Refrigeration components.



FURNACES 15530 - 2


A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Disposable Air Filters: Furnish two complete sets.



B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace the following components of furnaces that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period:

1. Warranty Period, Commencing on Date of Substantial Completion:

a. Furnace Heat Exchanger: 10 years. b. Integrated Ignition and Blower Control Circuit Board: Five years. c. Draft-Inducer Motor: Five years. d. Refrigeration Compressors: 10 years. e. Evaporator and Condenser Coils: Five years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GAS-FIRED FURNACES, CONDENSING

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:



FURNACES 15530 - 3

1. Carrier Corporation; Div. of United Technologies Corp. 2. Lennox Industries Inc. 3. Trane. 4. York International Corp.; a division of Unitary Products Group.

B. General Requirements for Gas-Fired, Condensing Furnaces: Factory assembled, piped, wired, and tested; complying with ANSI Z21.47/CSA 2.3, "Gas-Fired Central Furnaces," and with NFPA 54.

C. Cabinet: Steel.

1. Cabinet interior around heat exchanger shall be factory-installed insulation. 2. Lift-out panels shall expose burners and all other items requiring access for maintenance. 3. Factory paint external cabinets in manufacturer's standard color. 4. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with

requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

D. Fan: Centrifugal, factory balanced, resilient mounted, direct drive.

1. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors." 2. Special Motor Features: Single speed, Premium (TM) efficiency, as defined in

Division 15 Section "Motors," and with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication.

3. Special Motor Features: Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication.

4. Special Motor Features: Electronically controlled motor (ECM) controlled by integrated furnace/blower control.

E. Type of Gas: Natural.

F. Heat Exchanger:

1. Primary: Aluminized steel. 2. Secondary: Stainless steel.

G. Burner:

1. Gas Valve: 100 percent safety modulating main gas valve, main shutoff valve, pressure regulator, safety pilot with electronic flame sensor, limit control, transformer, and combination ignition/fan timer control board.

2. Ignition: Electric pilot ignition, with hot-surface igniter or electric spark ignition.

H. Gas-Burner Safety Controls:

1. Electronic Flame Sensor: Prevents gas valve from opening until pilot flame is proven; stops gas flow on ignition failure.

2. Flame Rollout Switch: Installed on burner box; prevents burner operation. 3. Limit Control: Fixed stop at maximum permissible setting; de-energizes burner on

excessive bonnet temperature; automatic reset.

I. Combustion-Air Inducer: Centrifugal fan with thermally protected motor and sleeve bearings prepurges heat exchanger and vents combustion products; pressure switch prevents furnace operation if combustion-air inlet or flue outlet is blocked.



FURNACES 15530 - 4

J. Furnace Controls: Solid-state board integrates ignition, heat, cooling, and fan speeds; adjustable fan-on and fan-off timing; terminals for connection to accessories; diagnostic light with viewport.

K. Accessories:

1. Combination Combustion-Air Intake and Vent: PVC plastic fitting to combine combustion-air inlet and vent through roof.

2. CPVC Plastic Vent Materials.

a. CPVC Plastic Pipe: Schedule 40, complying with ASTM F 441/F 441M. b. CPVC Plastic Fittings: Schedule 40, complying with ASTM F 438, socket type. c. CPVC Solvent Cement: ASTM F 493.

1) CPVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 490 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2) Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

3) Solvent cement and adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

3. PVC Plastic Vent Materials:

a. PVC Plastic Pipe: Schedule 40, complying with ASTM D 1785. b. PVC Plastic Fittings: Schedule 40, complying with ASTM D 2466, socket type. c. PVC Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.

1) PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).



L. Capacities and Characteristics: Refer to Schedule on drawings.

2.2 THERMOSTATS

A. Controls shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Controls."

B. Solid-State Thermostat: Wall-mounting, programmable, microprocessor-based unit with automatic and manual switching from heating to cooling, preferential rate control, seven-day programmability with minimum of four temperature presets per day,and battery backup protection against power failure for program settings.

C. Control Wiring: Unshielded twisted-pair cabling.

1. No. 24 AWG, 100 ohm, four pair.



FURNACES 15530 - 5

2.3 AIR FILTERS

A. Disposable Filters: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick fiberglass media with ASHRAE 52.2 MERV rating of 6 or higher, in sheet metal frame.

2.4 REFRIGERATION COMPONENTS

A. General Refrigeration Component Requirements:

1. Refrigeration compressor, coils, and specialties shall be designed to operate with CFC-free refrigerants.

2. Energy Efficiency: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Energy Standard for Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."

B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tubes mechanically expanded into aluminum fins. Comply with ARI 210/240, "Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment." Match size with furnace. Include condensate drain pan with accessible drain outlet complying with ASHRAE 62.1.

1. Refrigerant Coil Enclosure: Steel, matching furnace and evaporator coil, with access panel and flanges for integral mounting at or on furnace cabinet and galvanized sheet metal drain pan coated with black asphaltic base paint.

C. Refrigerant Line Kits: Annealed-copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized with nitrogen, sealed, and with suction line insulated. Provide in standard lengths for installation without joints, except at equipment connections.

1. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I, 1 inch (25 mm) thick.

D. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Refrigerant Piping."

E. Air-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Unit:

1. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel, with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.

2. Compressor: Hermetically sealed scroll type.

a. Crankcase heater. b. Vibration isolation mounts for compressor. c. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices,

start capacitor, relay, and contactor. d. Two-speed compressor motors shall have manual-reset high-pressure switch and

automatic-reset low-pressure switch. e. Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410A.

3. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.

4. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor. 5. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection. 6. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 30 deg F.



FURNACES 15530 - 6

F. Capacities and Characteristics: See Schedule on drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine factory-installed insulation before furnace installation. Reject units that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for [gas] [oil] [and refrigerant] piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install gas-fired furnaces and associated fuel and vent features and systems according to NFPA 54.

B. Install oil-fired furnaces and associated fuel and vent piping according to NFPA 31.

C. Suspended Units: Suspend from structure using threaded rods, spring hangers, and building attachments. Secure rods to unit hanger attachments. Adjust hangers so unit is level and plumb.

1. Install seismic restraints to limit movement of furnace by resisting code-required seismic acceleration.

D. Base-Mounted Units: Secure units to substrate. Provide optional bottom closure base if required by installation conditions.

1. Anchor furnace to substrate to resist code-required seismic acceleration.

E. Controls: Install thermostats and humidistats at mounting height of 60 inches (1500 mm) above floor.

F. Wiring Method: Install control wiring in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Conceal control wiring except in unfinished spaces.

G. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on 4-inch- (100-mm-) thick, reinforced concrete base; 4 inches (100 mm) larger on each side than unit. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor installation with concrete base.

H. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on concrete base.



FURNACES 15530 - 7

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Gas piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Fuel Gas Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Connect gas piping with union or flange and appliance connector valve.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Vent and Outside-Air Connection, Condensing, Gas-Fired Furnaces: Connect plastic piping vent material to furnace connections and extend outdoors. Terminate vent outdoors with a cap and in an arrangement that will protect against entry of birds, insects, and dirt.

1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly. 3. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and

fittings according to the following:

a. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

b. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. c. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC

socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

d. Requirements for Low-Emitting Materials:

1) CPVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 490 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2) PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).



4. Slope pipe vent back to furnace or to outside terminal.

D. Connect ducts to furnace with flexible connector. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."

E. Connect refrigerant tubing kits to refrigerant coil in furnace and to air-cooled, compressor-condenser unit.

1. Flared Joints: Use ASME B16.26 fitting and flared ends, following procedures in CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

2. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

3. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.



FURNACES 15530 - 8

F. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Refrigerant Piping" for installation and joint construction of refrigerant piping.


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Perform electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection. 2. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems with refrigerant and oil and test for leaks.

Repair leaks, replace lost refrigerant and oil, and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper operation, product capability, and compliance with requirements. 4. Verify that fan wheel is rotating in the correct direction and is not vibrating or binding. 5. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls

and equipment.

B. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration transmission to structure.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and perform the following:

1. Inspect for physical damage to unit casings. 2. Verify that access doors move freely and are weathertight. 3. Clean units and inspect for construction debris. 4. Verify that all bolts and screws are tight. 5. Adjust vibration isolation and flexible connections. 6. Verify that controls are connected and operational.

B. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.

C. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions and complete manufacturer's operational checklist.

D. Measure and record airflows.

E. Verify proper operation of capacity control device.

F. After startup and performance test, lubricate bearings and adjust belt tension.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.

B. Set controls, burner, and other adjustments for optimum heating performance and efficiency. Adjust heat-distribution features, including shutters, dampers, and relays, to provide optimum heating performance and system efficiency.



FURNACES 15530 - 9

3.7 CLEANING

A. After completing installation, clean furnaces internally according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install new filters in each furnace within 14 days after Substantial Completion.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain condensing units. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."




FURNACES 15530 - 10




METAL DUCTS 15815 - 1

SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air-distribution systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 10-inch wg. Metal ducts include the following:

1. Sheet metal materials. 2. Sealant materials. 3. Hangers and supports. 4. Rectangular ducts fabrication. 5. Round and oval duct and fitting fabrication. 6. Firestopping. 7. Duct applications.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air-moving and -distribution equipment and other air system components. Changes to layout or configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Welding certificates.

B. Field quality-control test reports.





A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," for hangers and supports, AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum," for aluminum supporting members, and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

B. NFPA Compliance:

1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work are limited to those listed. Submit alternate manufacturers to the Engineer for review and approval before bidding.

2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having G90 (Z275) coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view.

C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold-rolled sheets; commercial quality; with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts.

D. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts.

E. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.3 SEALANT MATERIALS

A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics.

B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts.

C. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.




D. Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.

E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick.

2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

3. Do not use power actuated or mechanical fasteners in post-tensioned concrete slabs where the cable locations are unknown. Fasteners shall not exceed 3/4-inch embedment.

B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod.

1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

2. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.

3. Galvanized-steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact surfaces painted with zinc-chromate primer.

4. Stainless Steel: All ductwork and accessories exposed to the aquatic environment shall be supported using stainless steel devices.

C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. Fasteners shall not project more than 1/4 inch into the air stream.

D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials unless materials are

electrolytically separated from ducts.

2.5 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION

A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" and complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint types and intervals.

1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure class.

2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."




B. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed using manufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcement.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Nexus Inc. c. Ward Industries, Inc.

C. Formed-On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, using corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Lockformer.

2. Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches wide and up to 2-inch wg pressure class. 3. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant.

D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area unless ducts are lined.

2.6 ROUND AND OVAL DUCT AND FITTING FABRICATION

A. Round, Longitudinal- and Spiral Lock-Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

B. Duct Joints:

1. Ducts up to 20 Inches in Diameter: Interior, center-beaded slip coupling, sealed before and after fastening, attached with sheet metal screws.

2. Ducts 21 to 72 Inches in Diameter: Three-piece, gasketed, flanged joint consisting of two internal flanges with sealant and one external closure band with gasket.

3. Ducts Larger than 72 Inches in Diameter: Companion angle flanged joints per SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2.

4. Round Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of double-lipped, EPDM rubber gasket. Manufacture ducts according to connection system manufacturer's tolerances.

a. Manufacturers:

1) Lindab Inc.

C. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for longitudinal-seam straight ducts.

D. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reduced entrance to branch taps and with no excess material projecting from fitting onto branch tap entrance.




E. Fabricate elbows using die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Bend radius of die-formed, gored, and pleated elbows shall be 1-1/2 times duct diameter. Unless elbow construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:

1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.

2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg:

a. Ducts 3 to 36 Inches in Diameter: 22 gauge. b. Ducts 37 to 50 Inches in Diameter: 20 gauge. c. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches in Diameter: 18 gauge. d. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches in Diameter: 16 gauge.

3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg:

a. Ducts 3 to 26 Inches in Diameter: 22 gauge. b. Ducts 27 to 50 Inches in Diameter: 20 gauge. c. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches in Diameter: 18 gauge. d. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches in Diameter: 16 gauge.

4. 90-Degree, 2-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems or for material-handling Class A or B exhaust systems and only where space restrictions do not permit using radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness turning vanes.

5. Round Elbows 8 Inches and Less in Diameter: Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45- and 90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction.

6. Round Elbows 9 through 14 Inches in Diameter: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees unless space restrictions require mitered elbows. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction.

7. Round Elbows Larger than 14 Inches in Diameter: Fabricate gored elbows unless space restrictions require mitered elbows.

8. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches in Diameter and All Pressures: 20 gauge with 2-piece welded construction.

9. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified above. 10. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 14 Inches in Diameter and Pressures through 10-Inch

wg: 26 gauge.

2.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Refer to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials and installation methods.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS




A. Static-Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the following:

1. Supply Ducts Connected to Furnaces: 2-inch wg. 2. Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 2-inch wg. 3. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 2-inch wg.

B. All ducts shall be galvanized steel.

3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Duct dimensions indicated on the drawings are internal sizes after the duct insulation has been applied. Increase the duct dimensions as required to keep the internal dimensions equal to those indicated on the drawings.

C. Install round ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet unless interrupted by fittings.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections.

F. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a minimum of 3 screws in each coupling.

G. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.

H. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

I. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

J. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions unless specifically indicated.

K. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts, and similar finished work.

L. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.

M. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.

N. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.




O. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at duct penetrations. Provide firestop materials and seal duct penetrations. Refer to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials and installation methods. Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories".

P. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed. Follow SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction."

3.3 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING

A. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated.

1. For pressure classes lower than 2-inch wg, seal transverse joints.

B. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.

3.4 HANGING AND SUPPORTING

A. Hanging devices shall be of the same material and construction as the ductwork being supported.

B. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

C. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet and at each floor.

D. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of failure (proof-test) load.

E. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

F. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.

1. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual" and prepare test reports:




1. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements.

2. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If pressure classes are not indicated, test entire system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

3. Determine leakage from entire system or section of system by relating leakage to surface area of test section.

a. Allowable Leakage, Supply Duct Systems: 3 percent of design airflow. b. Allowable Leakage, Return Duct Systems: 4 percent of design airflow. c. Allowable Leakage, Exhaust Supply Duct Systems: 4 percent of design airflow. d. Allowable Leakage, Supply Duct Systems, Terminals to Air Outlets: 3 percent of

design airflow.

4. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Class 3 for round ducts, Leakage Class 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classes lower than and equal to 2-inch wg (both positive and negative pressures), and Leakage Class 6 for pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg.

5. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is equal to or less than maximum allowable.

3.7 CLEANING NEW SYSTEMS

1. Clean the exterior of exposed ducts of oils and grease or other foreign material to allow painting under Division 9.








DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 - 1

SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Backdraft dampers. 2. Volume dampers. 3. Motorized control dampers. 4. Fire dampers. 5. Ceiling fire dampers. 6. Smoke dampers. 7. Combination fire and smoke dampers. 8. Turning vanes. 9. Duct-mounting access doors. 10. Flexible connectors. 11. Flexible ducts. 12. Duct accessory hardware.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Backdraft dampers. 2. Volume dampers. 3. Motorized control dampers. 4. Fire dampers. 5. Ceiling fire dampers. 6. Smoke dampers. 7. Combination fire and smoke dampers. 8. Turning vanes. 9. Duct-mounting access doors. 10. Flexible connectors. 11. Flexible ducts.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Special fittings. 2. Manual-volume damper installations. 3. Motorized-control damper installations.




4. Fire-damper, smoke-damper, and combination fire- and smoke-damper installations, including sleeves and duct-mounting access doors.

5. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work are limited to those listed. Submit alternate manufacturers to the Engineer for review and approval before bidding.

2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having G90 (Z275) coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view.

C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M.

D. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

E. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063, temper T6.

F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.




2.3 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS (STANDARD DUTY)

A. Manufacturers:

1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. American Warming and Ventilating. 3. CESCO Products. 4. Duro Dyne Corp. 5. Greenheck. 6. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 7. Prefco Products, Inc. 8. Ruskin Company. 9. Vent Products Company, Inc. 10. Air Specialties Express & Lloyd Industries 11. Air Specialties Express & Nailor 12. Nailor Ind

B. Description: Multiple-blade, parallel action gravity balanced, with center-pivoted blades of maximum 6-inch width, with sealed edges, assembled in rattle-free manner with 90-degree stop, steel ball bearings, and axles; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure, complete with required hardware and accessories and suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting.

C. Frame: 0.090-inch-thick 6063T5 extruded aluminum, with mitered corners and mounting flange for surface mounting or channel frame for duct mounting.

D. Blades: 0.050-inch-thick 6063T5 aluminum sheet.

E. Blade Seals: Extruded vinyl edge seals.

F. Blade Bearings: Molded synthetic or bronze with linkages concealed in the frame.

G. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.

H. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

I. Leakage: AM CA rated at less than 20 CFM/SF at 1.0 inch W.G. static pressure differential.

2.4 VOLUME DAMPERS (MANUAL)

A. Manufacturers:

1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. American Warming and Ventilating. 3. CESCO Products. 4. Greenheck. 5. METALAIRE, Inc. 6. Nailor Industries Inc. 7. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 8. Ruskin Company. 9. Titus. 10. Tuttle and Bailey. 11. Vent Products Company, Inc.




12. High efficiency die-stamped take-off, Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.

B. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class.

1. Pressure Classes of 3-Inch wg or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

C. Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple-blade, opposed-blade design, standard leakage rating, with linkage within airstream, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 16 gauge thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 16 gauge thick, galvanized sheet steel. 3. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 4. Bearings: Molded synthetic or bronze, both ends. 5. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

D. Low-Leakage Volume Dampers: Multiple-blade, opposed-blade design, low-leakage rating, with linkage within airstream, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 16 gauge thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 16 gauge thick, galvanized sheet steel. 3. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 4. Bearings: Molded synthetic thrust or ball. 5. Blade Seals: Vinyl. 6. Jamb Seals: Cambered stainless steel. 7. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

E. Jackshaft: 1-inch-diameter, galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.

1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each damper in multiple-damper assembly.

F. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch-thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

G. Verify that the damper material and construction is compatible with the air quality and type carried by the duct.

2.5 CONTROL DAMPERS


1. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc.




2. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. 3. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 4. Pottorff. 5. Ruskin Company.

B. Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage.

C. Frames:

1. 0.094-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel. 2. Mitered and welded corners.

D. Blades:

1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 6 inches (152 mm). 2. Opposed-blade design. 3. Galvanized-steel. 4. 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick single skin or 0.0747-inch- (1.9-mm-) thick dual skin. 5. Blade Edging: Closed-cell neoprene,

2.6 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. CESCO Products. 3. Greenheck. 4. METALAIRE, Inc. 5. Nailor Industries Inc. 6. National Controlled Air. 7. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 8. Pottoroff. 9. Prefco Products, Inc. 10. Ruskin Company. 11. Safe Air. 12. Vent Products Company, Inc.

B. Fire dampers shall be labeled according to UL 555.

C. Fire Rating: Dampers shall be dynamic, 1-1/2 or 3 hours, depending on the rating of the wall in which it is to be installed.

D. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 22 gauge thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

E. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Thickness: 18 gauge or 10 gauge thick as applicable and of length to suit application.

2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper frame complies with sleeve requirements.




F. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

G. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 22 gauge thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 22 gauge thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.

H. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.

I. Fusible Links: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated.

J. Leakage: Class I.

K. Verify that the damper material and construction is compatible with the air quality and type carried by the duct.

2.7 CEILING FIRE DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. CESCO Products. 3. Greenheck. 4. METALAIRE, Inc. 5. Nailor Industries Inc. 6. National Controlled Air. 7. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 8. Pottoroff. 9. Prefco Products, Inc. 10. Ruskin Company. 11. Safe Air. 12. Vent Products Company, Inc.

B. General Description: Labeled according to UL 555C; comply with construction details for tested floor- and roof-ceiling assemblies as indicated in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory."

C. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, round or rectangular, style to suit ceiling construction.

D. Blades: Galvanized sheet steel with refractory insulation.

E. Fusible Links: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated.

2.8 SMOKE OR COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. CESCO Products. 3. Greenheck. 4. Nailor Industries Inc. 5. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 6. Prefco Products, Inc. 7. Ruskin Company.




B. General Description: Labeled according to UL 555S. Combination fire and smoke dampers shall be labeled according to UL 555 for 1-1/2-hour rating, or 3-hour rating.

C. Fusible Links: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated.

D. Frame and Blades: 16 gauge thick, galvanized sheet steel.

E. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 18 gauge thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit wall or floor application.

F. Damper Motors: Provide for two-position action.

1. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear trains.

2. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 150 in. x lbf.

3. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft., size motor for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x lbf.

4. Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz or pneumatic with actuator/motor out of the air stream.

G. Leakage: Class II.

H. Verify that the duct material and construction is compatible with the air quality and type carried by the duct.

2.9 TURNING VANES

A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1-1/2-inch-wide, single-vane, curved blades of galvanized sheet steel set 3/4 inch o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches o.c.; and set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Duro Dyne Corp. c. METALAIRE, Inc.

C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.

2.10 DUCT-MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS

A. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.




B. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and rectangular; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where indicated. Include 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.

1. Manufacturers:

a. American Warming and Ventilating. b. CESCO Products. c. Ductmate Industries, Inc. d. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. e. Greenheck. f. Nailor Industries Inc. g. Ventfabrics, Inc.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Provide number of hinges and locks as follows:

a. Less than 12 Inches Square: Secure with two sash locks. b. Up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.

2.11 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Duro Dyne Corp. 2. Nailor Industries Inc. 3. Ventfabrics, Inc. 4. Ward Industries, Inc.

B. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1.

C. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 24 gauge thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch-thick aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with ducts.

D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

E. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.

1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd. 2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F.




2.12 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 3. Hart & Cooley, Inc. 4. Thermaflex.

B. Noninsulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, multiple layers of aluminum laminate supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F.

C. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, multiple layers of aluminum laminate supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation with an R-value of 4.2 or higher; polyethylene or aluminized vapor barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F.

D. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action or nylon strap, in sizes 3 through 18 inches to suit duct size.

2.13 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

C. Splitter Damper Accessories: Zinc plated damper blade bracket, 1/4 inch zinc plated operating rod, and a duct mounted ball joint bracket with flat rubber gasket and square head set screw.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.




C. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated.

D. Install volume dampers in ducts with liner; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.

E. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of two duct widths from branch takeoff.

F. Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install fire and smoke dampers, with fusible links, according to manufacturer's UL-approved written instructions.

H. Install duct silencers rigidly to ducts.

I. Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units as follows:

1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Downstream from volume dampers, turning vanes, and equipment. 3. Adjacent to fire or smoke or combination fire/smoke dampers, providing access to reset

or reinstall fusible links.

J. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, rectangular access doors:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches. 6. Body Plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.

K. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, round access doors:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 inches in diameter. 2. Two-Hand Access: 10 inches in diameter. 3. Head and Hand Access: 12 inches in diameter. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 18 inches in diameter. 5. Body Access: 24 inches in diameter.

L. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, pressure relief access doors:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 7 inches in diameter. 2. Two-Hand Access: 10 inches in diameter. 3. Head and Hand Access: 13 inches in diameter. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 19 inches in diameter.

M. Label access doors according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."

N. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators.




O. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and higher, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.

P. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.

Q. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly or with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.

R. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands or adhesive plus sheet metal screws.

S. Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.

B. Test and adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action. Coordinate with fire alarm contractor.

C. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."





THIS PAGE INTENTIIONALLY LEFT BLANK



POWER VENTILATORS 15838 - 1

SECTION 15838 - POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Ceiling-mounted ventilators. 2. In-line centrifugal fans.


A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on actual Project site elevations.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Also include the following:

1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound-power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. 6. Roof curbs. 7. Fan speed controllers.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.



A. Field quality-control reports.





A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Belts: One set(s) for each belt-driven unit.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA-Certified performance ratings and shall bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

C. UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. Power ventilators for use for restaurant kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

C. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.2 CEILING-MOUNTED VENTILATORS


1. Breidert Air Products. 2. Carnes Company. 3. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 4. Loren Cook Company. 5. PennBarry.

B. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation.

C. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel shall be removable for service.




D. Grille: Painted aluminum, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fan housing.

E. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor plug-in.

F. Accessories:

1. Manufacturer's standard roof jack or wall cap, and transition fittings.

G. Capacities and Characteristics: See schedule on drawings.

2.3 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS


1. Breidert Air Products. 2. Carnes Company. 3. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 4. Loren Cook Company. 5. PennBarry.

B. Housing: Split, spun aluminum with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet flanges, and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.

C. Direct-Drive Units: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing; with wheel, inlet cone, and motor on swing-out service door.

D. Belt-Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside of fan housing.

E. Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.

F. Accessories: 3. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections. 5. Motor and Drive Cover (Belt Guard): Epoxy-coated steel.

G. Capacities and Characteristics: See schedule on drawings.


A. Certify sound-power level ratings according to AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

B. Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.

B. Support units using spring isolators having a static deflection of 1 inch (25 mm) .

1. Secure vibration and seismic controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast in concrete base.

C. Install floor-mounted units on concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

D. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. See Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs.

E. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps.

F. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers with vertical-limit stops having a static deflection of .5 inch (25 mm) . Vibration-control devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

G. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

H. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."

B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.

C. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

D. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."


A. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.




B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan

wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.

5. Adjust belt tension. 6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to

indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. 10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators. 11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Adjust belt tension.

C. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.

E. Lubricate bearings.








DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855 - 1

SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes ceiling, floor, and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Provide product data for each product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Krueger. 2. Price Industries. 3. Titus. 4. Tuttle & Bailey. 5. Nailor

2.2 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

A. Refer to "Diffuser, Register, and Grille" schedule on the drawings for requirements.


A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."



DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.




INTAKE AND RELIEF VENTILATORS 15856 - 1

SECTION 15856 - INTAKE AND RELIEF VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Roof hoods.


A. Delegated Design: Design ventilators, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using structural performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes, without buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, or other detrimental effects.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

C. Water Entrainment: Limit water penetration through unit to comply with ASHRAE 62.1-2004.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For gravity ventilators. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, ventilator attachments to curbs, and curb attachments to roof structure.

1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing water intrusion.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For shop-fabricated ventilators indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of shop-fabricated ventilators.





A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.

B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) zinc coating, mill phosphatized.

C. Fasteners: Same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials.

1. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. 2. Use hex-head or Phillips pan-head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise

indicated.

D. Post-Installed Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors made from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain without failure a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed for masonry, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

2.2 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Factory or shop fabricate gravity ventilators to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units to the minimum extent as necessary for shipping and handling. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Fabricate frames, including integral bases, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.

C. Fabricate units with closely fitted joints and exposed connections accurately located and secured.

D. Fabricate supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.




E. Perform shop welding by AWS-certified procedures and personnel.

2.3 ROOF HOODS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corporation. 2. Aerovent. 3. Carnes. 4. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 5. Loren Cook Company. 6. Air Specialties Express & Nailor

B. Factory or shop fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figures 5-6 and 5-7.

C. Materials: Aluminum sheet, minimum 0.063-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick base and 0.050-inch- (1.27-mm-) thick hood; suitably reinforced.

D. Roof Curbs: Galvanized-steel sheet; with mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- (40-mm-) thick, rigid fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch (40-mm) wood nailer. Size as required to fit roof opening and ventilator base.

1. Configuration: Built-in raised cant and mounting flange. 2. Overall Height: 16 inches (400 mm).

E. Bird Screening: Galvanized-steel, 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) square mesh, 0.041-inch (1.04-mm) wire.

F. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Finish:

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, grease, and other contaminants. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing according to ASTM A 780. Apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it.

2. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated, apply an air-dried primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install gravity ventilators level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

B. Install gravity ventilators with clearances for service and maintenance.

C. Install perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.




D. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as installation progresses. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during installation.

E. Label gravity ventilators according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

F. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals.

G. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories.




TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 - 1

SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce design objectives, including the following:

1. Balancing airflow within distribution systems, including submains, branches, and terminals, to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances.

2. Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities. 3. Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment. 4. Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment. 5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. 6. Balancing water flow and adjusting pump performance for domestic hot water circulating

system. 7. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.

B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and terminals, according to design quantities.

C. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

D. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested.

E. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the distribution system.

F. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and reporting the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

G. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

H. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.




I. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

J. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Quality-Assurance Submittals: Submit 3 copies of evidence that the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent and this Project's testing, adjusting, and balancing team members meet the qualifications specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article below.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 3 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3 of this Section.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 3 copies of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article below. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project.

D. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.

E. Warranty: Submit 3 copies of special warranty specified in the "Warranty" Article below.


A. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by either AABC or NEBB.

B. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing, adjusting, and balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified testing, adjusting, and balancing reports.

2. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the approved testing, adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.

C. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from AABC, NEBB, or SMACNA.

D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC or NEBB national standards.

E. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or more frequently if required by the instrument manufacturer.




1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner may occupy completed areas of the building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with the Owner during testing, adjusting, and balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the Owner's operations.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing activities.

B. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: The national project performance guarantee specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC'S "National Standards" forms stating that AABC will assist in completing the requirements of the Contract Documents if the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent fails to comply with the Contract Documents.

C. Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in completing the requirements of the Contract Documents if the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions:

1. The certified Agent has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents.

2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment.

B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC and domestic hot water systems and equipment. Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves.




C. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification Sections have been performed.

D. Examine system and equipment test reports.

E. Examine HVAC and domestic hot water systems and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

F. Examine the HVAC and domestic hot water systems and verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and

access to balancing devices is provided. 8. Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system operations can be

met.

G. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing.

H. Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

I. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.

J. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.

K. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:

1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices operate by the intended controller. 2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller. 3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed

and fully open positions. 4. Thermostats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls. 5. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions. 6. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents. 7. Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record system reactions to

changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from design values. 8. Interlocked systems are operating. 9. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to design values.

L. Report deficiencies discovered to the Contractor for correction, and to the Architect. Continue balancing systems after deficiencies have been corrected.




3.2 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in this section, and in either AABC national standards; NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems"; or SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to the insulation Specifications for this Project.

C. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, valve indicators, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.

3.3 FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

B. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.

C. Check the airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

D. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

E. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

F. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

G. Check for airflow blockages.

H. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

I. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.

3.4 CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES

A. The procedures in this Article apply to constant-volume supply-, return-, and exhaust-air systems.

B. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm listed by the fan manufacturer.

1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.




b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as

possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum

that houses the fan.

2. Measure static pressure across each air-handling unit component.

a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel must change filters.

3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat recovery equipment, and air washers under final balanced conditions.

4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions.

5. Adjust fan speed higher or lower than design with the approval of the Architect. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes.

6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, and economizer modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

C. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances.

1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

a. Where sufficient space in submains and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.

2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submains and branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances.

D. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or the outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.

E. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflows within specified tolerances of design values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at the air terminals.

1. Adjust each outlet in the same room or space to within specified tolerances of design quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.

2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

3.5 FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS




A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.

B. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above:

1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check expansion tank liquid level. 3. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so

motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.

3.6 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES

A. Determine water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive-displacement pumps:

1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Verify with the pump manufacturer that this will not damage pump. Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on the manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and confirm that the pump has the intended impeller size.

2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark the pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until design water flow is achieved.

3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on the pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.

4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design.

B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.

C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.

1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.

D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than design flow.

E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of design flow rate as follows:

1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over design flow. 2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over

design flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over design flow. 3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.

F. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures, including outdoor-air temperature.

G. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of balancing.




3.7 MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating if high-efficiency motor. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

3.8 CONDENSING UNITS

A. Verify proper rotation of fans and measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures. Record compressor data.

3.9 TEMPERATURE TESTING

A. During testing, adjusting, and balancing, report need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic temperature-control system.

B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of 2 successive 8-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.

C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.

3.10 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION

A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.

B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control functions.

C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.

D. Verify operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).

E. Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.

F. Verify sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and correlate with airflow and water-flow measurements.

G. Confirm interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.

H. Confirm interaction of interlock and lockout systems.

I. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine if the system operates on a grounded or nongrounded power supply.




J. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.

3.11 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system airflow and domestic hot water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Plus 10 to minus 5 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3. Domestic Hot Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.

3.12 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article above, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC and domestic hot water systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.

B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system.

3.13 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in 3-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.

B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

1. Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

C. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include approved Shop

Drawings and Product Data.

D. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable:

1. Title page. 2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address.




7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report. 10. Summary of contents, including the following:

a. Design versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

11. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 12. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings. 13. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from design values. 14. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the following:

a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present with single-line diagrams and include the following:

1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations.

F. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:

1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. i. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches. j. Number of belts, make, and size. k. Number of filters, type, and size.

2. Motor Data: Include the following:




a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches.

3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg. f. Preheat coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. g. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. h. Heating coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. i. Outside airflow in cfm. j. Return airflow in cfm. k. Outside-air damper position. l. Return-air damper position. m. Vortex damper position.

G. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports: For apparatus coils, include the following:

1. Coil Data: Include the following:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Coil type. d. Number of rows. e. Fin spacing in fins per inch. f. Make and model number. g. Face area in sq. ft. h. Tube size in NPS. i. Tube and fin materials. j. Circuiting arrangement.


a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Average face velocity in fpm. c. Air pressure drop in inches wg. d. Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. h. Water flow rate in gpm. i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. j. Entering-water temperature in deg F. k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types. m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig. n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F. o. Inlet steam pressure in psig.




H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data: Include the following:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches.

2. Motor Data: Include the following:

a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches. g. Number of belts, make, and size.


a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.

I. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data: Include the following:

a. System and air-handling unit number. b. Location and zone. c. Traverse air temperature in deg F. d. Duct static pressure in inches wg. e. Duct size in inches. f. Duct area in sq. ft. g. Design airflow rate in cfm. h. Design velocity in fpm. i. Actual airflow rate in cfm. j. Actual average velocity in fpm. k. Barometric pressure in psig.

J. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: For terminal units, include the following:


a. System and air-handling unit identification.




b. Location and zone. c. Test apparatus used. d. Area served. e. Air-terminal-device make. f. Air-terminal-device number from system diagram. g. Air-terminal-device type and model number. h. Air-terminal-device size. i. Air-terminal-device effective area in sq. ft.


a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Air velocity in fpm. c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm. d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm. e. Final airflow rate in cfm. f. Final velocity in fpm. g. Space temperature in deg F.

K. Pump Test Reports: For pumps, include the following data. Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves.


a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Service. d. Make and size. e. Model and serial numbers. f. Water flow rate in gpm. g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig. i. Pump rpm. j. Impeller diameter in inches. k. Motor make and frame size. l. Motor horsepower and rpm. m. Voltage at each connection. n. Amperage for each phase. o. Full-load amperage and service factor. p. Seal type.


a. Static head in feet of head or psig. b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig. c. Actual impeller size in inches. d. Full-open flow rate in gpm. e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig. f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig. g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig. h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig. i. Final water flow rate in gpm. j. Voltage at each connection. k. Amperage for each phase.




L. Instrument Calibration Reports: For instrument calibration, include the following:

1. Report Data: Include the following:

a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration.

3.14 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections, testing, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.
